Chevrolet 2010 Malibu Hybrid Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Chevrolet Chevrolet-2010-Chevrolet-Malibu-Hybrid-Owners-Manual-813966 chevrolet-2010-chevrolet-malibu-hybrid-owners-manual-813966 chevrolet pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 400 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

In Brief ........................................................... 1-1
Instrument Panel ........................................ 1-2
Initial Drive Information ............................... 1-4
Vehicle Features ...................................... 1-14
Hybrid Features ....................................... 1-19
Performance and Maintenance ................... 1-21
Seats and Restraint System ............................. 2-1
Head Restraints ......................................... 2-2
Front Seats ............................................... 2-4
Rear Seats .............................................. 2-10
Safety Belts ............................................. 2-12
Child Restraints ....................................... 2-32
Airbag System ......................................... 2-58
Restraint System Check ............................ 2-75
Features and Controls ..................................... 3-1
Keys ........................................................ 3-2
Doors and Locks ....................................... 3-8
Windows ................................................. 3-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 3-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 3-19
Mirrors .................................................... 3-32
Storage Areas ......................................... 3-33
Sunroof .................................................. 3-35
Instrument Panel ............................................. 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 4-3
Climate Controls ...................................... 4-19
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 4-24
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 4-40
Audio System(s) ....................................... 4-53
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ....... 5-2
Towing ................................................... 5-23
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 6-1
Service ..................................................... 6-3
Fuel ......................................................... 6-5
Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 6-12
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 6-39
Bulb Replacement .................................... 6-39
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 6-42
2010 Chevrolet Malibu Hybrid Owner Manual M
Tires ...................................................... 6-43
Appearance Care ..................................... 6-72
Vehicle Identification ................................. 6-79
Electrical System ...................................... 6-80
Capacities and Specifications ..................... 6-90
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 7-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 7-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 8-1
Customer Assistance and Information ........... 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 8-16
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 8-18
Index ................................................................ 1
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, the MALIBU
Emblem, and the name MALIBU are registered
trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle either because they are options
that you did not purchase or due to changes subsequent
to the printing of this owner manual. Please refer to the
purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle
to confirm each of the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor
Division wherever it appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Canadian Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com
Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25852254 A First Printing
©
2009 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Warning Messages found on vehicle labels and in this
manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid
or reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
which will result in serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result
in injury or death.
{WARNING:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Notice: This means there is something that could
result in property or vehicle damage. This would not
be covered by the vehicle’s warranty
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,”
or “Do not let this happen.”
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
M:This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
*:This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
iv
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
9:Airbag Readiness Light
#:Air Conditioning
!:Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g:Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar
®
$:Brake System Warning Light
":Charging System
I:Cruise Control
B:Engine Coolant Temperature
O:Exterior Lamps
#:Fog Lamps
.:Fuel Gage
+:Fuses
i:Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j:LATCH System Child Restraints
*:Malfunction Indicator Lamp
::Oil Pressure
}:Power
/:Remote Vehicle Start
>:Safety Belt Reminders
7:Tire Pressure Monitor
F:Traction Control
M:Windshield Washer Fluid
v
✍NOTES
vi
Instrument Panel ..............................................1-2
Initial Drive Information ....................................1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................1-4
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................1-4
Door Locks ....................................................1-5
Trunk Release ...............................................1-5
Windows .......................................................1-6
Seat Adjustment .............................................1-6
Head Restraint Adjustment ...............................1-8
Safety Belt ....................................................1-8
Sensing System for Passenger Airbag ...............1-9
Mirror Adjustment ...........................................1-9
Steering Wheel Adjustment ............................1-10
Interior Lighting ............................................1-11
Exterior Lighting ...........................................1-11
Windshield Wiper/Washer ...............................1-12
Climate Controls ...........................................1-13
Vehicle Features .............................................1-14
Radio(s) ......................................................1-14
Satellite Radio ..............................................1-15
Portable Audio Devices
(Auxiliary Input or USB Port) .......................1-15
Steering Wheel Controls ................................1-16
Bluetooth
®
...................................................1-16
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................1-17
Cruise Control ..............................................1-18
Power Outlets ..............................................1-18
Hybrid Features ..............................................1-19
Charge/Assist Gage ......................................1-19
Fuel Economy Light ......................................1-19
Automatic Engine Start/Stop Feature ...............1-20
Regenerative Braking ....................................1-20
Battery ........................................................1-21
Service .......................................................1-21
Performance and Maintenance .........................1-21
Traction Control System (TCS) .......................1-21
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ....................1-22
Tire Pressure Monitor ....................................1-22
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ....................1-23
Engine Oil Life System ..................................1-23
Driving for Better Fuel Economy .....................1-23
Roadside Assistance Program ........................1-24
OnStar
®
......................................................1-24
Section 1 In Brief
1-1
Instrument Panel
1-2
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4-24.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4-4.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4-25.
D. Windshield Wipers on page 4-5 and Windshield
Washer on page 4-6.
E. Instrument Panel Storage on page 3-34.
F. Audio System(s) on page 4-53.
G. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4-15.Fog
Lamps on page 4-14.
H. Driver Storage Compartment on page 3-34.
I. Cruise Control on page 4-7.Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4-40.
J. Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel on page 4-3.
K. Horn on page 4-3.
L. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4-84
(If Equipped).
M. Ignition Positions on page 3-20.
N. Automatic Climate Control System on page 4-19.
O. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4-3.
P. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 3-25.
Q. Front Storage Area on page 3-34.Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 4-17.
R. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4-29.
S. Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-7
(If Equipped).
T. Glove Box on page 3-33.
1-3
Initial Drive Information
This section provides a brief overview about some of
the important features that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer to each of the
features which can be found later in this owner manual.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and
unlock the doors from up to 60 m (195 feet) away from
the vehicle.
Press Kto unlock the
driver door. Press again
within five seconds to
unlock all remaining doors.
Press Qto lock all doors.
Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized.
Press and hold Vfor approximately one second to
open the trunk.
Press Land release to locate the vehicle.
Press Land hold for three seconds to sound the panic
alarm.
Press Lagain to cancel the panic alarm.
See Keys on page 3-2 and Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 3-3.
Remote Vehicle Start
Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press Q.
3. Immediately after completing Step 2, press and
hold /until the turn signal lamps flash.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
The doors will be locked and the climate control system
may come on.
1-4
The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat
the steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote
start can be extended only once.
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start:
•Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and hold /until the parking lamps turn off.
•Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
•Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF position
and then back to LOCK/OFF.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3-5.
Door Locks
Manual Locks
From inside the vehicle slide the door lock knob to
unlock or lock a door.
Power Door Locks
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are on
the front doors.
":Press to unlock the doors.
Q:Press to lock the doors.
For more information, see:
•Door Locks on page 3-8.
•Power Door Locks on page 3-8.
Trunk Release
In addition to the trunk release button on the RKE
transmitter, there is a remote release Vbutton located
on the driver door near the map pocket.
The trunk can only be opened when the vehicle is in
P (Park), or when the ignition is off.
See Trunk on page 3-11.
1-5
Windows
On vehicles with power windows, the switches are on
the driver door armrest. Each passenger door has
a switch that controls only that window.
Press the front of the switch to open the window.
Pull the switch up to close it.
For more information, see Power Windows on
page 3-14.
Seat Adjustment
Manual Seat
1. Lift the bar under the seat to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release
the bar.
Try to move the seat to be sure it is locked in place.
See Manual Seats on page 2-4.
1-6
Power Seats (If Equipped)
Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
control forward or rearward.
Raise or lower the front or rear of the seat by moving
the front or rear of the control up or down.
See Power Seats on page 2-5.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
(If Equipped)
To raise or recline the seatback, tilt the top of the
control forward or rearward.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2-6.
1-7
Power Lumbar Adjustment
Press the front (A) or rear (B) of the control to increase
or decrease lumbar support.
See Power Lumbar on page 2-5
Head Restraint Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants
are installed and adjusted properly.
For more information see Head Restraints on page 2-2.
Safety Belt
Refer to the following sections for important information
on how to use safety belts properly.
•Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2-12.
•How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2-17.
•Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2-26.
•Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 2-26
•Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2-44.
1-8
Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbags are not affected by this.
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on
the instrument panel when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-68 for
important information.
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door.
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Move the selector switch located below the four-way
control pad to the left or right to choose either the
driver side or passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
Keep the selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
United States Canada
1-9
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push
the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to
return to its original position.
Interior Mirror
Vehicles with an automatic dimming rearview mirror will
automatically reduce the glare from the headlamps of the
vehicle behind. The dimming feature comes on and the
indicator light illuminates each time the ignition is turned
to start.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 3-32.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
The lever is located on the left side of the steering
wheel column. To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down or backward
or forward into a comfortable position.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
See Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel on page 4-3.
1-10
Interior Lighting
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
To turn the dome lamps on manually, turn the
instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column,
clockwise to the farthest position. The dome lamps will
remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
Reading Lamps
The front reading lamps are located in the front
overhead console. The rear reading lamps are near the
dome lamp overhead near the rear passenger seats.
For vehicles with front and/or rear reading lamps, press
the lens to turn the lamp on and off, while the doors
are closed. These lamps come on automatically when
any door is opened.
For more information on interior lighting, see:
•Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4-15.
•Entry/Exit Lighting on page 4-15.
•Parade Dimming on page 4-15.
Exterior Lighting
The lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
P:Briefly turn to this position to manually turn the
automatic lamp control off or on.
In Canada; this only works when the vehicle is in
P (Park). When the vehicle is put into D (Drive) the lights
come on.
AUTO: Turns on the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
during daytime, and the headlamps, parking lamps, and
taillamps at night.
1-11
;:Manual operation of the parking lamps and other
exterior lamps.
2:Manual operation of the headlamps and other
exterior lamps.
For more information, see:
•Exterior Lamps on page 4-10.
•Delayed Headlamps on page 4-13.
•Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 4-13.
•Automatic Headlamp System on page 4-14.
•Fog Lamps on page 4-14.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of
the steering column.
9:Turns the wipers off.
&:For intermittent or speed sensitive operation.
While in this position, turn the xband up or down to
vary frequency.
1-12
The amount of delay time varies between wiping cycles
due to the delay setting selected or the speed of the
vehicle. As vehicle speed is increased or decreased, the
wiper interval also increases or decreases.
6:Slow wipes.
1:Fast wipes.
8:Use for a single wiping cycle.
Windshield Washer: Press the button at the end of the
lever until the washers begin.
See Windshield Wipers on page 4-5 and Windshield
Washer on page 4-6.
Climate Controls
A. Fan Control
B. Air Conditioning
C. Air Recirculation
D. Hybrid Air
Conditioning
E. Rear Window Defogger
F. Air Delivery Mode Control
G. Display
H. Temperature Control
See Automatic Climate Control System on page 4-19.
1-13
Vehicle Features
Radio(s)
O:Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
BAND: Press to choose between FM1, AM, or XM™,
if equipped.
f:Select radio stations.
©¨:Seek or scan stations.
4:For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features,
press to display additional text information related to the
current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3, WMA song.
Song title information will be displayed on the top line of
the display while the artist information will be displayed
on the bottom line, if the information is available during
XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback. When information is not
available, ″No Info″displays.
For more information about these and other radio
features, see Audio System(s) on page 4-53 and
Radio(s) on page 4-55.
Storing a Favorite Station
For vehicles with an XM™ radio, a maximum of
36 stations can be stored as favorites using the
six softkeys located below the radio station frequency
tabs and by using the radio FAV button. Press FAV
to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having
six favorite stations available per page. Each page
of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or
XM stations.
If the radio does not have XM, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed on
the six numbered buttons.
See Radio(s) on page 4-55.
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown
1-14
Setting the Clock
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN.
2. Press Oto turn the radio on.
3. Press Hand the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year) displays.
4. Press the softkey located below any one of the tabs
that you want to change.
5. Increase or decrease the time or date by turning
fclockwise or counterclockwise.
For detailed instructions on setting the clock for your
specific audio system, see Setting the Clock on
page 4-54.
Satellite Radio
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM satellite radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound.
A fee is required to receive the XM service.
For more information, refer to:
•www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
•www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See “XM Satellite Radio Service” under Radio(s)
on page 4-55.
Portable Audio Devices
(Auxiliary Input or USB Port)
This vehicle may have an auxilliary input and a USB
port, located on the audio faceplate. External devices
such as iPods
®
, laptop computers, MP3 players,
CD changers, USB storage devices, etc. can be
connected to the auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
input jack or the USB port depending on the audio
system.
Press the CD/AUX button to play audio from the
portable player.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” and “Using the
USB Port” under Radio(s) on page 4-55.
1-15
Steering Wheel Controls
These controls are located
on the steering wheel.
e+/e−:Increases or decreases volume.
w/x:Press to change radio stations, select tracks on
a CD, or to select tracks and navigate folders on an
iPod
®
or USB device.
bg:Press to silence the vehicle speakers only. Press
again to turn the sound on. Press and hold longer
than two seconds to interact with the OnStar
®
or
Bluetooth systems.
c:Press to reject an incoming call, or to end a call.
For more information, see Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 4-84.
Bluetooth
®
For vehicles with an in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
allows users with a Bluetooth enabled cell phone to make
and receive hands-free calls using the vehicle’s audio
system and controls.
The Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired with
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it can be used in
the vehicle. Not all phones will support all functions.
For more information visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
See Bluetooth
®
on page 4-74.
1-16
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC display is located at the bottom of the
instrument panel cluster. It shows the status of
many vehicle systems and enables access to the
personalization menu.
The DIC buttons are
located on the left side of
the steering wheel.
INFO: Press to scroll through the vehicle information
displays.
r:Press to reset some vehicle information displays,
select a personalization setting, or acknowledge a
warning message.
For more information, see Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 4-40.
Vehicle Personalization
Some vehicle features can be programmed by using the
DIC buttons on the left side of the steering wheel.
These features include:
•Oil Life Reset
•Units
•RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback
•Door Lock and Unlock Settings
•Language
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4-48.
1-17
Cruise Control
The cruise control buttons
are located on the left side
of the steering wheel.
J:On/Off.
RES+: Press to resume or accelerate speed.
SET−:Press to set or decrease speed.
For more information, see Cruise Control on page 4-7.
Power Outlets
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone.
There are two accessory power outlets. One accessory
power outlet is located inside the storage bin below
the climate controls and the other outlet is on the rear of
the center storage console.
To use an outlet, lift the protective cap.
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4-17.
1-18
Hybrid Features
Charge/Assist Gage
The CHARGE/ASSIST
gage displays the charge,
into and out of the hybrid
battery.
When the gage indicates ASSIST, the electric motor
assists for maximum acceleration.
When the gage indicates CHARGE, the electric motor
operates as a generator to perform regenerative braking
while decelerating.
The gage also indicates CHARGE when the system is
recharging the hybrid battery.
See Charge/Assist Gage on page 4-39 for more
information.
Fuel Economy Light
This light comes on to
indicate the vehicle is
achieving fuel economy at
or greater than its rated
fuel economy.
Driving habits that improve fuel economy increase the
time that the fuel economy light is on.
See Fuel Economy Light on page 4-40.
This light can be enabled or disabled. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 4-48.
1-19
Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Feature
Automatic Engine Start/Stop
The vehicle has an automatic engine start/stop feature.
After the engine is started and has reached operating
temperature, the AUTO STOP feature may cause the
engine to turn off when you apply the brakes and come to
a complete stop. When you take your foot off the brake
pedal or press the accelerator pedal, the engine will
start. The engine will continue to run until the next
AUTO STOP.
To restart the engine during the AUTO STOP, release
the brake pedal or press the accelerator pedal. The
engine starts immediately. The vehicle continues to run
until the next stop.
The AUTO STOP symbol on the tachometer signifies
that the engine is in AUTO STOP mode. See Auto Stop
Mode on page 4-39 for more information. A chime will
sound when the driver door is opened while in AUTO
STOP mode. Remember to shift to P (Park) and turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF before exiting the vehicle.
See Starting the Engine (Automatic Engine Start/Stop)
on page 3-21.
Regenerative Braking
Regenerative braking takes some of the energy from
the moving vehicle and turns it back into electrical
energy. This energy is then stored back into the
vehicle’s hybrid battery system, contributing to increased
fuel efficiency.
The system works whenever you take your foot off the
accelerator pedal while the vehicle is moving in a
forward gear. This causes the vehicle to slow down
more quickly. It may feel like the brake pedal is being
pressed, even when it is not.
United States Canada
1-20
Battery
This vehicle has a standard 12-volt battery and a
36-volt hybrid battery system. See Battery on page 6-32.
The 36-volt battery is located behind the rear seat, in
the trunk. If the vehicle is stored for an extended period
of time, drive the vehicle every two months for about
half an hour to keep the 36-volt hybrid battery charged
and in good working condition. If a new 36-volt hybrid
battery system is needed, see your dealer/retailer.
Service
Never try to do your own service on hybrid components.
You can be injured and the vehicle can be damaged
if you try to do your own service work. Service and
repair of these hybrid components should only be
performed by a trained service technician with the
proper knowledge and tools. See Doing Your Own
Service Work on page 6-4
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control System (TCS)
The traction control system limits wheel spin. The
system turns on automatically every time the vehicle is
started.
•To turn off traction control, press and release ton
the instrument panel. Filluminates and
the appropriate DIC message is displayed.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-43.
•Press and release the button again to turn on traction
control.
For more information, see Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 5-7.
1-21
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control system assists with
directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions. The system turns on automatically every
time the vehicle is started.
•To turn off both traction control and Electronic
Stability Control, press and hold tuntil F
illuminates and the appropriate DIC message is
displayed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4-43.
•Press and release the button again to turn on both
systems.
For more information, see Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 5-5.
Tire Pressure Monitor
The Tire Pressure Monitor
alerts you when a
significant reduction in
pressure occurs in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires
by illuminating the low tire
pressure warning light on
the instrument cluster.
The warning light will remain on until the tire pressure is
corrected. The proper tire pressures for your vehicle
are listed on the Tire and Loading Information label
located on the driver side center pillar (B pillar).
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18.
You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire
pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is
first started and then turn off as you drive. This may be
an early indicator that your tire pressures are getting
low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
1-22
Note: The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert you about
low tire pressure, but it does not replace normal
monthly tire maintenance. It is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6-50 and
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6-52.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
This vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit which
can be used to seal small punctures in the tread area
of the tire.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 6-65 for
complete operating information.
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life
based on vehicle use and displays a DIC message
when it is necessary to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset to 100% only
following an oil change.
Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press and hold the DIC INFO and reset buttons, on
the left side of the steering wheel, at the same time
to enter the personalization menu. The OIL LIFE
RESET message displays.
3. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC
display shows ACKNOWLEDGED.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6-18.
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
•Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
•Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
•Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
•When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
•Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
1-23
•Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
•Combine several trips into a single trip.
•Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
•Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
Roadside Assistance Program
U.S.: 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872)
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new GMC, you are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program. This
program provides technically trained advisors who are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, minor repair
information or towing arrangements.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
If you have a current OnStar subscription, press the
OnStar button and the current GPS location will be sent
to an OnStar Advisor who will assess your problem,
contact Roadside Assistance, and relay exact location to
get you the help you need.
Online Owner Center
The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service
that includes online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner manual, special
privileges and more.
Sign up today at: www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
OnStar
®
OnStar
®
uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
navigation, diagnostics, and calling services.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can automatically alert an
OnStar advisor who is immediately connected to
the vehicle to see if you need help.
1-24
How OnStar Service Works
Q:This blue button connects you to a specially trained
OnStar advisor to verify your account information and
to answer questions.
]:Push this red emergency button to get priority help
from specially trained OnStar emergency advisors.
X:Push this button for hands-free, voice-activated
calling and to give voice commands for turn-by-turn
navigation.
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside Assistance,
Turn-by-Turn Navigation and Hands-Free Calling are
available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar services are
available on all vehicles. For more information see the
OnStar Owner’s Guide or visit www.onstar.com (U.S.)
or www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or
TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press Qto speak with an
OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
For a full description of OnStar services and system
limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s Guide in the
glove box.
OnStar service is subject to the OnStar terms and
conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or
at all times.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar call center when Qis pressed, ]is pressed, or
if the airbags or ACR system deploy. This information
usually includes the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional information regarding the
crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the direction
from which the vehicle was hit). When the virtual advisor
feature of OnStar hands-free calling is used, the vehicle
also sends OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can
provide services where it is located.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
1-25
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar hands-free calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4-84
for more information.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system
may not be functioning properly. Press Qand request
a vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press Qto confirm
that the OnStar equipment is active.
1-26
Head Restraints ...............................................2-2
Front Seats ......................................................2-4
Manual Seats ................................................2-4
Power Seats ..................................................2-5
Power Lumbar ...............................................2-5
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................2-6
Power Lift Seat ..............................................2-9
Rear Seats .....................................................2-10
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................2-10
Safety Belts ...................................................2-12
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................2-12
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................2-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................2-26
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................2-31
Safety Belt Extender .....................................2-32
Child Restraints .............................................2-32
Older Children ..............................................2-32
Infants and Young Children ............................2-35
Child Restraint Systems .................................2-39
Where to Put the Restraint .............................2-41
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) ......................................2-44
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ....................................2-52
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ............................2-54
Airbag System ...............................................2-58
Where Are the Airbags? ................................2-61
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................2-63
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................2-65
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................2-65
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....2-66
Passenger Sensing System ............................2-68
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........2-73
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................2-74
Restraint System Check ..................................2-75
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................2-75
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................2-76
Section 2 Seats and Restraint System
2-1
Head Restraints
The vehicle’s front seats have adjustable head restraints
in the outboard seating positions.
{WARNING:
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a
crash.
2-2
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint down.
Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not designed to be removed.
2-3
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{WARNING:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
2-4
Power Seats
If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of
the seats.
To adjust the seat:
•Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
•Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
•Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
Power Lumbar
On seats with power lumbar, the control is located on
the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press the front (A) or rear (B) of the control to increase
or decrease lumbar support.
2-5
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{WARNING:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
{WARNING:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side
of the seat.
2-6
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback returns to the upright
position.
2. Release the lever to lock the seatback.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2-7
Power Reclining Seatbacks
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control
used to recline them is located on the outboard side
of the seat behind the power seat control.
•To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
•To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the
control forward.
{WARNING:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you
are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion,
have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the
seat and wear your safety belt properly.
2-8
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is
moving.
Power Lift Seat
On vehicles with a power lift seat, press the top or
bottom of the switch to raise or lower the seat.
2-9
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
With this feature, either side of the seatback can be
folded down for more cargo space.
Before folding a seatback, make sure the front seat is
not reclined. If it is, the rear seatback will not fold down
all the way.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety
belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return
them to their normal stowed position before folding
a rear seat. To lower the rear seatback, pull up on the seatback
strap while folding the seatback down. This allows
access to the trunk.
2-10
To raise the rear seatback pull the seatback up and
make sure it latches. Push and pull on the seatback
to be sure it is locked in position. Make sure that
the safety belts are properly stowed over the seatback
in all three positions.
{WARNING:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
{WARNING:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in the
upright locked position.
2-11
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things
not to do with safety belts.
{WARNING:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt
cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or
your passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts,
the injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
{WARNING:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4-27
for additional information.
2-12
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without safety belts, they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
2-13
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
2-14
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... or the instrument panel...
2-15
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And
you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
2-16
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the
vehicle, see Older Children on page 2-32 or Infants and
Young Children on page 2-35. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
2-17
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
2-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
{WARNING:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
2-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
{WARNING:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
2-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
{WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
2-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is over an armrest.
{WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
2-22
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
{WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
2-23
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is behind the body.
{WARNING:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
2-24
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
{WARNING:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
2-25
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, just let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the
right front seating position may affect the passenger
sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 2-68 for more information.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 2-32.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-26
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in
this section for instruction on use and important
safety information.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position. Slide the
latch plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt
is not in use. The latch plate should rest on the stitching
on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out
of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.
2-27
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away from
the face and neck, but not falling off of the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Squeeze the buttons (A)
on the sides of the height
adjuster and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try
to move it down without squeezing the buttons to
make sure it has locked into position.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety
belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts
during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal
and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle
has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners
can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a crash,
they will need to be replaced, and probably other new
parts for the vehicle’s safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 2-76.
2-28
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides.
If not, they are available through your dealer/retailer.
The guides may provide added safety belt comfort for
older children who have outgrown booster seats and for
some adults. When installed and properly adjusted, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck
and head.
Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt:
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
2-29
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
{WARNING:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
2-30
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt
edges together so that the safety belt can be removed
from the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its
storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the
seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop of
the elastic cord exposed.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
2-31
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer
will order you an extender. When you go in to order it,
take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will
be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it
is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it
to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
2-32
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
•Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
•Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using
the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety
Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 2-26 for more information. If the shoulder belt
still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the
booster seat.
•Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
•Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
•If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional
restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2-26.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
2-33
{WARNING:
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
{WARNING:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
2-34
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
{WARNING:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every time infants and
young children ride in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike other
people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
2-35
{WARNING:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
2-36
{WARNING:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
2-37
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{WARNING:
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
2-38
{WARNING:
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
2-39
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
2-40
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 2-44 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
2-41
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
WARNING: (Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-68 for
additional information.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
2-42
If you secure a child restraint in the left or center rear
seat using LATCH, review the following illustrations.
Depending on where you place the child restraint, you
may not be able to access certain safety belt assemblies
or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child
restraints.
Configurations for Use of Child
Restraints
A. Child restraint using
LATCH
B. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
A. Occupant prohibited
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
A. Child restraint using
LATCH
B. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
C. Child restraint using
safety belt or LATCH
or occupant using
safety belt
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
2-43
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Lower Anchors
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
2-44
Top Tether Anchor
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint to
the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle.
The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order
to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for
use with or without the top tether being attached. Others
require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada,
the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a
kit is available.
2-45
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i(Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j(Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
rear anchor position has
a label, near the crease
between the seatback and
the seat cushion.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
Rear Seat
2-46
The top tether anchors are located under the covers,
behind the rear seat, on the filler panel. Be sure to use
an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top tether must be
attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 2-41 for
additional information.
2-47
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{WARNING:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with the child
restraint and the instructions in this manual.
{WARNING:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor
or attachment to come loose or even break during a
crash. A child or others could be injured. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{WARNING:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.
2-48
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to
its stowed position, before folding the seat.
If you need to secure more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, see Where to Put the Restraint on page 2-41.
Depending on where you place the child restraint, you
may not be able to access certain safety belt assemblies
or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child
restraints.
You cannot secure three child restraints using the LATCH
anchors in the rear seat at the same time, but you can
install two of them. If you want to do this, install one
LATCH child restraint in the passenger-side position,
and install the other one either in the driver-side position
or in the center position. Refer to the following illustration
to learn which anchors to use.
A. Passenger Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
B. Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors
C. Driver Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper
anchor location.
2-49
This system is designed to make installation of child
restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use
the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead use the vehicle’s
anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the
restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
Open the cover to expose the anchor.
2.2. If the position you are using has an
adjustable headrest or head restraint,
raise it. See Head Restraints on page 2-2.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to the child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
2-50
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether under the
headrest or head restraint
and in between the
headrest or head restraint
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 2-2.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether
route the tether under the
headrest or head restraint
and in between the
headrest or head restraint
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 2-2.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
2-51
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is compatible with
this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2-44
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using
a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2-44 for top
tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
Restraint on page 2-41.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
2-52
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
2-53
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2-44 for
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety
belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 2-41.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 2-68 and Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4-29 for more information, including
important safety information.
2-54
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
WARNING: (Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-68 for
additional information.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2-44
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH) on page 2-44 for top tether anchor
locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
2-55
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator
on the passenger airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4-29.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-56
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock. 6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
2-57
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System
on page 2-68 for more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
•A frontal airbag for the driver.
•A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
•A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
•A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
•A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
•A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on
the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must
inflate very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
2-58
{WARNING:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See
When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 2-63.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
{WARNING:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the blink
of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to
the airbag, as you would be if you were sitting on
the edge of your seat or leaning forward. Safety
belts help keep you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail
airbags.
2-59
{WARNING:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on page 2-32
or Infants and Young Children on page 2-35.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4-28
for more information.
2-60
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
2-61
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
2-62
{WARNING:
If something is between an occupant and an airbag,
the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force
the object into that person causing severe injury or
even death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything between an
occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near
any other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation
path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle
with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
2-63
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
•If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
•If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
•If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
•If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash
severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal sensors, which
help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate
frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact. For
moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflate at a
level less than full deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System on page 2-58.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed threshold level. The threshold level can
vary with specific vehicle design.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are
not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck. A roof-rail airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag
should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the
vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the
vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by the
location and severity of the side impact.
2-64
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag
modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side
windows that have occupant seating positions.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 2-63 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
2-65
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated
for some time after they deploy. Some components
of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes.
For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2-65.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving
the vehicle.
{WARNING:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have breathing problems but cannot get out of the
vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you experience
breathing problems following an airbag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn off the interior lamps
and hazard warning flashers by using the controls for
those features.
2-66
{WARNING:
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may
have also damaged important functions in the
vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and
steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears
to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may
be concealed damage that could make it difficult
to safely operate the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the
engine after a crash has occurred.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
•Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
•The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 8-18 and Event Data Recorders on page 8-18.
•Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
2-67
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is started.
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, are
visible during the system check. If you are using remote
start, if equipped, to start the vehicle from a distance, you
may not see the system check. When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or OFF, or the symbol for
on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4-29.
The passenger sensing system turns off the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag under certain conditions. The driver airbags and
the roof-rail airbags are not affected by the passenger
sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child
restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an
older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
United States Canada
2-68
{WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped),
no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag if:
•The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
•The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
•The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
•The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
•A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
•The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
•Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit
to remind you that the airbags are off. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 4-29.
2-69
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in
the right front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbags are active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there
is an airbag for that person.
{WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4-28
for more information, including important safety
information.
2-70
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 2-54.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle
off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure
that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child
restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 2-2.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit with an infant present in a
child restraint, secure the child restraint in a rear seat
position in the vehicle and see your dealer/retailer.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
2-71
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in
the Index for additional information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the
way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged.
This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing
system to turn the airbag(s) off for some adult size
occupants. If this happens, let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
2-72
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM
for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2-74 for more
information about modifications that can affect how
the system operates.
{WARNING:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 8-17.
{WARNING:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
2-73
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, overhead console, front sensors, side
impact sensors, or airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could
also interfere with the operation of the passenger
sensing system. This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent
the passenger sensing system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System on page 2-68.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8-2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 8-2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
2-74
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4-27 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 6-75.
Airbags
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4-28 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2-65. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
2-75
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{WARNING:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during
any crash may have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer/retailer to have the safety belt
assemblies inspected or replaced.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if
the safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped),
was not being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4-28.
2-76
Keys ...............................................................3-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................3-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ...................................................3-3
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................3-5
Doors and Locks .............................................3-8
Door Locks ....................................................3-8
Power Door Locks ..........................................3-8
Door Ajar Reminder ........................................3-8
Delayed Locking .............................................3-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................3-9
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................3-10
Lockout Protection ........................................3-10
Trunk ..........................................................3-11
Windows ........................................................3-13
Power Windows ............................................3-14
Sun Visors ...................................................3-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................3-16
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................3-16
PASS-Key
®
III+ Electronic Immobilizer .............3-17
PASS-Key
®
III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation .................................................3-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................3-19
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................3-19
Ignition Positions ..........................................3-20
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................3-21
Starting the Engine
(Automatic Engine Start/Stop) ......................3-21
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................3-24
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................3-25
Parking Brake ..............................................3-27
Regenerative Braking ....................................3-28
Shifting Into Park ..........................................3-28
Shifting Out of Park ......................................3-29
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................3-30
Engine Exhaust ............................................3-30
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................3-31
Mirrors ...........................................................3-32
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................3-32
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................3-32
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................3-33
Storage Areas ................................................3-33
Glove Box ...................................................3-33
Cupholders ..................................................3-33
Instrument Panel Storage ...............................3-34
Front Storage Area .......................................3-34
Center Console Storage .................................3-34
Driver Storage Compartment ..........................3-34
Sunroof .........................................................3-35
Section 3 Features and Controls
3-1
Keys
{WARNING:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8-7.
3-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
•Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
•Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
•Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
•If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 60 m (195 feet) away from the vehicle.
Keep in mind that other conditions, such as those
previously stated, can impact the performance of the
transmitter.
/(Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press to operate the remote start feature.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3-5 for additional
information.
With Remote Start
Shown, Without Remote
Start Similar
3-3
Q(Lock): Press to lock all the doors. The interior lamps
turn off after all of the doors are closed. If enabled
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the remote
lock feedback can be programmed to have the horn
chirp and/or the turn signals flash to confirm locking. See
“LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 4-48 for more information.
Pressing Qmay also arm the content theft-deterrent
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3-16.
K(Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.
Press Kagain within five seconds to unlock all
remaining doors. The interior lamps turn on and stay on
for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled
through the DIC, the remote unlock feedback can be
programmed to have the horn chirp and/or the turn
signals flash to confirm unlocking. See “UNLOCK HORN”
and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 4-48 for more information.
The high-beam headlamps, parking lamps, and back-up
lamps may come on each time Kis pressed. See “EXT
(Exterior) LIGHTS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 4-48 for additional information.
Pressing Kon the RKE transmitter disarms the content
theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 3-16.
V(Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for
about one second to unlock the trunk. The trunk can be
opened with the transmitter when the vehicle speed
is less than 3 km/h (2 mph) or when the ignition is off.
L(Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The horn sounds three times
and the headlamps and turn signals flash three times.
Press and hold Lfor about three seconds to initiate the
panic alarm. The horn sounds and the headlamps
and turn signals flash for 30 seconds. Press Lagain
to cancel the panic alarm.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle
will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters
no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to four transmitters
programmed to it.
3-4
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT (Battery)
LOW message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB
BATT (Battery) LOW” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4-43 for additional information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature that
allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
It may also start the vehicle’s heating or air conditioning
systems and rear window defogger. When the remote
start system is active and the vehicle has an automatic
climate control system, it will automatically regulate the
inside temperature. Normal operation of these systems
will return after the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.
3-5
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3-3 for additional
information.
/(Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s
remote start button for about four seconds or until
the vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The doors
will lock.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn on
and remain on while the engine is running.
The remote start feature provides two separate starts
per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine
running time, or one start with a time extension.
The first start must expire or be canceled to get
two separate 10 minute starts.
If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been
driven, repeat the previous steps, while the engine is
still running, to extend the engine running time by
10 minutes from the time you repeat the steps for remote
starting. The remote start running time can be extended
one time and only after the first remote start.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,
unless a time extension has been done or the
vehicle’s key is inserted into the ignition switch and
turned to ON/RUN.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following.
•Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and release the remote start button.
•Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
•Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF position
and then back to LOCK/OFF.
The parking lamps turn off to indicate the engine is off.
After the engine has been started two times, or one
time with a time extension, the vehicle’s ignition must
be turned to ON/RUN using the key before the remote
start procedure can be used again. See Ignition
Positions on page 3-20 for information regarding the
ignition positions on your vehicle.
3-6
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the follow occur:
•The remote start system is disabled through
the DIC.
•The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
•The vehicle’s hood is open.
•The hazard warning flashers are on.
•The check engine light is on. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 4-34.
•The engine coolant temperature is too high.
•The oil pressure is low.
•Two remote vehicle starts, or one start with a time
extension, have already been provided for that
ignition cycle.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote start system
enabled. The system may be enabled or disabled
through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 4-48 for additional
information.
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature.
This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.
3-7
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{WARNING:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
•Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle.
When a door is locked, the handle will not open
it. The chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are
not locked. So, all passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the doors should be
locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
•Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
•Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
Locking your doors can help prevent this from
happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
To lock or unlock the door from the outside, use the key
in the driver or front passenger door or press the lock or
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, if the vehicle has one.
To lock a door from the inside, push the manual lock
knob down or use the power door lock switches.
Power Door Locks
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are
located on the front doors.
"(Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q(Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press
to lock the doors.
Door Ajar Reminder
A chime will sound and the DOOR AJAR message will
display if one of the doors is not fully closed. This
happens when the ignition is on and the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park) or N (Neutral). See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4-43.
3-8
Delayed Locking
This feature allows the driver to delay the locking of the
vehicle. It will not operate with the key in the ignition.
See Lockout Protection on page 3-10.
Press the driver power door lock switch or the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock button once. With
the key removed from the ignition and the driver door
open, the following occurs:
•Three chimes sound to signal the delay.
•All doors will lock and the turn signals flash once
five seconds after the last door has been closed.
•The horn chirps if the horn chirp feature is enabled.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4-48.
If a door is opened before the five seconds has elapsed,
the doors do not lock until five seconds after all doors
are closed.
If the power door lock switch or the transmitter lock
button is pressed twice when leaving the vehicle, the
doors lock immediately.
If the power door unlock switch or the transmitter unlock
button is pressed, the doors unlock immediately and
do not lock automatically after the doors are closed.
This feature is turned on at the factory but may be
turned off through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4-48.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
The vehicle is programmed to lock all doors
automatically when the following are met:
•All doors are closed.
•The ignition is on.
•The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
This feature cannot be disabled.
All doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into
P (Park).
The power door unlock function can be programmed
through prompts displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 4-48.
3-9
Rear Door Security Locks
The vehicle has rear door security locks to prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
Open the rear doors to
access the security locks
on the inside edge of
each door.
To set the locks, insert a key into the slot and turn it to
the horizontal position. The door can only be opened
from the outside with the door unlocked. To return
the door to normal operation, turn the slot to the vertical
position.
Lockout Protection
This feature prevents the driver door from being locked
using the power door locks, if the key is left in the
ignition and a door is open.
Press the power door lock switch to lock all the doors
and then unlock the driver door.
Press and hold the power door lock switch for more
than three seconds to override this feature.
If the key is removed from the ignition, or if the
manual door lock or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is used, the key could still be locked
inside the vehicle. Always remember to take the
key with you.
3-10
Trunk
Press the trunk release button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter for one second to open the
trunk from the outside.
{WARNING:
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or
trunk/hatch open:
•Close all of the windows.
•Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
WARNING: (Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
•Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
•If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3-30.
Remote Trunk Release
Press the button located
on the driver door near the
map pocket to open the
trunk.
The trunk can only be opened while the vehicle is in
P (Park) or when the ignition is off.
3-11
Trunk Assist Handle
There is an assist handle
located on the inside of
the trunk.
Use the assist handle to lower the trunk lid. The TRUNK
AJAR message will appear if the trunk is not properly
closed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-43
for more information.
Notice: Using the trunk assist handle as a tie-down
or anchor point when securing items in the trunk
may damage it. Use the trunk assist handle only to
help you close the trunk lid.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the trunk latch.
This handle glows following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle up to open the trunk from the inside.
3-12
Windows
{WARNING:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
3-13
Power Windows
The power window
switches are located on
the armrest on the driver’s
door. In addition, there
is a switch on each
passenger door.
Press or pull up on the front of the switch to open
or close the window.
Express-Down Window
The driver window has an express-down feature. This
switch is labeled AUTO. Press the front all the way down
and release, to automatically lower.
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front of
the switch momentarily. To raise the window, pull and
hold the front of the switch.
Express-Up Window
On windows with this feature, pull the switch up to the
second position and release the switch to activate
the express-up feature. To stop the window as it is going
up, pull up or press down briefly on the switch again.
Programming the Power Windows
If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, the driver power window
will need to be re-programmed for the express-up
feature to work. Replace or recharge the vehicle’s
battery before reprogramming.
To program the driver window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN, or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,
close all doors.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window is fully open.
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is
fully closed.
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately
two seconds after the window is completely closed.
The window is now reprogrammed.
3-14
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when the
express-up is active, the window stops at the obstruction
and auto-reverse to a preset factory position. Weather
conditions such as severe icing may also cause the
window to auto-reverse. The window returns to normal
operation once the obstruction or condition is removed.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
{WARNING:
If express override is activated, the window will
not reverse automatically. You or others could be
injured and the window could be damaged. Before
you use express override, make sure that all people
and obstructions are clear of the window path.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window switch
all the way up to the second position. The window rises
for as long as the switch is held. Once the switch is
released, the express mode is re-activated.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
Window Lockout
The driver power window controls also include a lockout
button.
o(Window Lockout): Press the lockout button to stop
the rear passengers from using their window switches.
The driver and front passenger can still operate all the
windows with the lock on. When the red part of the switch
is visible, you have returned to normal window operation.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, swing down the visors. They can
also be removed from the center mount and swung to
the side, to block out glare from the side. The visors
also have extenders that can be pulled out.
The vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrors
located on the passenger and driver side visors. A light
turns on when the cover is lifted.
3-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
Arming the System
With the ignition off, press the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter lock button to arm the system.
The system will arm 30 seconds after all the doors are
closed, or 60 seconds with any door open.
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a
second time while all the doors are closed, the system
will arm immediately. The system will still arm in
60 seconds if a door is open. When the open door is
closed, the system will arm.
The security light, located on the instrument panel
cluster, comes on to indicate that arming has been
initiated. Once the system is armed, the security light
flashes once every three seconds.
If the security light is flashing twice per second, this
means that a door is open.
If the system is armed and the key is used to unlock the
vehicle, the alarm will be activated.
If you do not want to arm the content theft system, lock
the vehicle with the manual lock knob on the doors or with
the inside power door lock switches.
The alarm will sound and the exterior lights will flash if
any door is opened while armed.
Disarming the System
To disarm the system, do one of the following:
•Press the RKE transmitter unlock button.
•Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will stop
flashing.
3-16
How the System Alarm is Activated
To activate the system if it is armed:
•Open the driver’s door or trunk. A ten second
pre-alarm chirp will sound followed by a
thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.
•Open any other door. A full alarm of horn and lights
will immediately sound for thirty seconds.
•Open the hood. If the vehicle has the remote start
feature, it will activate the full alarm.
When an alarm event has finished, the system will
re-arm itself automatically.
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
To turn off the system alarm:
•Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
The system will then re-arm itself.
•Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
This will also disarm the system.
•Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. This will
also disarm the system.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If three chirps are heard when the unlock or lock button
is pressed on the RKE transmitter, it means that the
content theft security system alarm was previously
triggered.
PASS-Key
®
III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
3-17
PASS-Key
®
III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key
®
III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key
®
III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key
®
III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the security light on the instrument panel
cluster comes on, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be not damaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses on
page 6-81. If the engine still does not start with the other
key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start,
the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who
can service the PASS-Key
®
III+ to have a new key made.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8-7.
It may be possible for the PASS-Key
®
III+ decoder to
“learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or
do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-Key
®
III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the system.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key
®
III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
3-18
To program the new key:
1. Verify that the new key has a 1stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
see your dealer/retailer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the
ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original
key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key
®
III+ system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key
®
III+ system at this time.
If the PASS-Key
®
III+ key is lost or damaged, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key
®
III+ to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
•Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
•Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
3-19
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal must be
applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
9(LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also
locks the transmission. The key can only be removed
in LOCK/OFF.
The shift lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition
switch to LOCK/OFF.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to left
while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
doesn’t work, the vehicle needs service.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets you use
things like the radio and windshield wipers while
the engine is not running.
R(ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel warning lights. The switch will stay in this position
while the engine is running.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle
if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
/(START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to the ON/RUN position for driving.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is opened,
the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF and
the key is in the ignition.
3-20
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
•Audio System
•Power Windows
•Sunroof (if equipped)
These features continue to work up to 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF.
The power windows and sunroof will work until any door
is opened.
The radio continues to work until the driver door is
opened.
All these features operate when the key is in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
Starting the Engine
(Automatic Engine Start/Stop)
The shift lever must be in P (Park) or N (Neutral) for the
vehicle to start. To restart the engine when the vehicle
is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle
is stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go
of the key. The idle speed goes down as your engine
gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the
engine and protects components. If the key is
turned to the START position, and then released
when the engine begins cranking, the engine
continues cranking for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and
the key is held in START, cranking stops after
15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.
3-21
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition
switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF
position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and holding it there as you
hold the key in START for up to a maximum of
15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds between
each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool down.
When the engine starts, let go of the key and
accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then
stops again, do the same thing. This clears the
extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms
up and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop
{WARNING:
Exiting the vehicle, without first shifting into
P (Park), may cause the vehicle to move, you or
others may be injured. Because the vehicle has
the Automatic Engine Start/Stop feature, the
vehicle’s engine might seem to be shut off,
however, once the brake pedal is released, the
engine will start up again.
Shift to P (Park) and turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF, before exiting the vehicle.
3-22
The vehicle has an automatic engine start/stop feature.
After the engine is started and has reached operating
temperature, the AUTO STOP feature may cause
the engine to turn off when you apply the brakes and
come to a complete stop. When you take your foot
off the brake pedal or press the accelerator pedal, the
engine will start. The engine will continue to run until the
next AUTO STOP.
The AUTO STOP symbol on the tachometer signifies
that the engine is in AUTO STOP mode. See Auto Stop
Mode on page 4-39 for more information. When the
vehicle is turned off, the tachometer will move to OFF.
If the driver door is opened while in AUTO STOP
mode, a chime will sound.
To restart the engine during the AUTO STOP, release
the brake pedal or press the accelerator pedal. The
engine starts immediately. The vehicle continues to run
until the next stop.
There are several conditions which may prevent an
AUTO STOP or cause an AUTO START.
The Engine Will Remain Running When:
•The engine, transmission, or hybrid battery is
not warmed up yet.
•The outside temperature is less than 5°F (−15°C).
•While the A/C is in Normal Mode.
•A/C is in Hybrid Mode and the climate control
system is working to cool the vehicle. See Automatic
Climate Control System on page 4-19 for more
information.
•Defrost is selected.
•The shift lever is in P (Park), N (Neutral),
R (Reverse), I (Intermediate) or L (Low).
•The hybrid battery pack charge is low.
•The 12V vehicle battery charge is low, or loads
are high.
•The hood is not fully closed.
The Engine Will Restart When:
•The brake pedal is released.
•The accelerator pedal is applied.
•When shifting out of D (Drive) to any other gear.
•If the Hybrid A/C button is selected, the duration
of the AUTO STOP will depend on the outside
temperature. This economy mode improves
fuel economy by limiting the effects of the air
conditioning. The warmer it is outside, the shorter
the time before the engine is restarted to provide
cabin cooling.
3-23
•The climate control system is turned from Off to
Normal A/C or defrost See Automatic Climate
Control System on page 4-19 for more information.
•The engine is required to run for either heater or
climate control performance. See “Air Conditioning
Engine Start/Stop” under Automatic Climate Control
System on page 4-19 for more information.
•The hybrid battery pack charge is low and requires
recharging.
•Auto Stop time is greater than two minutes.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles with
an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at least
four hours before starting the vehicle. An internal
thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will
prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The engine coolant heater cord is located near
the air cleaner box. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-14 for more information on
location.
{WARNING:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt
AC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated
for at least 15 amps.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt
AC outlet.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts and prevent damage.
3-24
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in
the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the
best advice on this.
Automatic Transmission Operation
The shift lever is located on the console between
the seats.
There are several different
positions for the automatic
transmission.
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot move easily.
{WARNING:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 3-28.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. Fully apply the
brake pedal, and then press the shift lever button before
shifting from P (Park) when the ignition key is in ON/RUN.
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the
shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
P (Park) while maintaining brake application. Then press
the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of Park on page 3-29.
3-25
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging the transmission, see
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 5-17.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the
vehicles is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also,
use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
{WARNING:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving with the
automatic transmission. It provides the best fuel
economy. If you need more power for passing, and
you are:
•Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
•Going above 35 mph (55 km/h), push the accelerator
all the way down.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
Control on page 5-11.
I (Intermediate): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed without using
the brakes for slight downgrades. If constant upshifting or
downshifting occurs while driving up steep hills, this
position can be used to prevent repetitive shifts. You
might choose I (Intermediate) instead of D (Drive) when
driving on hilly, winding roads, so that there is less
shifting between gears.
3-26
The engine will not Auto Stop when the shifter is in
I (Intermediate). See Starting the Engine (Automatic
Engine Start/Stop) on page 3-21
L (Low): This position reduces vehicle speed more
than I (Intermediate) without actually using the brakes.
Use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in L (Low), the transmission will not
shift into L (Low) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake,
push down the parking
brake pedal with your left
foot. If the ignition is on, the
brake system warning light
will come on. See Brake
System Warning Light on
page 4-30.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot. Push down momentarily
on the parking brake pedal with your left foot until you
feel the pedal release. If the parking brake is not
released when you begin to drive, the brake system
warning light will be on and a chime will sound warning
you that the parking brake is still on.
3-27
The PUSH PARK PEDAL message will also appear in
the Driver Information Center (DIC) to remind you
to release the parking brake. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4-43.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
Regenerative Braking
Regenerative braking takes some of the energy from the
moving vehicle and turns it back into electrical energy.
This energy is then stored back into the vehicle’s hybrid
battery system, contributing to increased fuel efficiency.
The system works whenever you take your foot off the
accelerator pedal while the vehicle is moving in a
forward gear. This causes the vehicle to slow down
more quickly. It may feel like the brake pedal is being
pressed, even when it is not.
Shifting Into Park
{WARNING:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3-27 for more
information.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the shift lever
all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
3-28
Leaving the Vehicle with the Engine
Running
{WARNING:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if
the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with
the engine running, it could overheat and even
catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not
leave the vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is
firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved the
shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal
down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from P (Park) without first pushing the button.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
locked in P (Park).
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too
much force on the parking pawl in the transmission.
This happens when parking on a hill and shifting
the transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and
then it is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into P (Park). To find out how, see “Shifting Into
P (Park)” listed previously.
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).
Shifting Out of Park
The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to apply the brake pedal then
press the shift lever button before you can shift from
P (Park). See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 3-25.
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press
the shift lever button and move the shift lever into the
gear you wish.
3-29
Parking Over Things That Burn
{WARNING:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
Engine Exhaust
{WARNING:
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
WARNING: (Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
•The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
•The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
•The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
•The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
•There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
•Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
•Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
3-30
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{WARNING:
Exiting the vehicle, without first shifting into
P (Park), may cause the vehicle to move, and you
or others can be seriously injured. Because the
vehicle has the Automatic Engine Start/Stop
feature, the vehicle’s engine might seem to be shut
off when you come to a complete stop. However,
once the brake pedal is released, the vehicle can
move. The vehicle’s engine can also restart at
any time.
Shift to P (Park) and turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF,
before exiting the vehicle.
{WARNING:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3-30.
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 3-28.
3-31
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view of behind your vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind.
Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for
nighttime use.
Vehicles with OnStar
®
have three additional control
buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See
your dealer/retailer for more information on the system
and how to subscribe to OnStar
®
. See the OnStar
®
owner guide for more information about the services
OnStar
®
provides.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror and OnStar
®
controls. See your
dealer/retailer for more information on the system
and how to subscribe to OnStar
®
. See the OnStar
®
owner guide for more information about the services
OnStar
®
provides.
O(On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on
or off.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from
behind the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on and
the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is
started.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror.
Use a soft towel dampened with water.
3-32
Outside Power Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door.
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Move the selector switch located below the four-way
control pad to the left or right to choose either the
driver side or passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
Keep the selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return to its original position.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Pull the handle up to open.
Cupholders
Removable cupholders are located in front of the center
console. See “Center Console Storage Area” following
for how to access them. Press and hold the tab at
the rear of the cupholders and lift up and rearward to
remove the cupholders. This will disengage the
two forward tabs.
To reinstall them, place the two forward tabs into the
slots and push the rear of the cupholder down.
For vehicles with rear seat cupholders, pull down the
door on the back of the center console to access them.
3-33
Instrument Panel Storage
An instrument panel storage area, with a removable
liner, is located above the radio. Slide the latch toward
the back of the vehicle to open the storage area.
Front Storage Area
A storage area is located in front of the shift lever.
Push the bottom of the door and the storage will
automatically open.
Center Console Storage
The center console storage area has a storage tray and
a main storage. Pull up on the driver side latch to
access the storage tray. Pull up on the passenger side
latch to access the main storage. There is a removable
divider and may be a storage pocket located at the
rear of the center console.
The armrest on top of the center console can be
adjusted to a rearward, middle, and forward position.
Pull or push the front of the armrest to adjust to
the desired position.
Another storage area is located in front of the main
storage. Push down and then forward on the rear of the
cover to access. There is a storage tray and removable
cupholders.
Driver Storage Compartment
A driver storage compartment is located near the left
side of the steering column on the bottom of the
instrument panel. Pull the cover down to open.
Pull out to remove for cleaning.
3-34
Sunroof
On vehicles with a sunroof,
the switch is located on
the headliner between the
map lamps.
The sunroof only operates when the ignition is in
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or if Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 3-21.
Press and release the back of the switch to open the
sunroof to the vent position. From the vent position, press
and release the back of the switch to express-open the
sunroof. To stop the sunroof from express opening, press
the switch again. If the sunshade is closed, it will open
automatically when the sunroof opens past the vented
position.
A deflector will automatically raise when the sunroof is
opened. The deflector will retract when the sunroof
is closed.
To close the sunroof, press the front of the switch and
hold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if
the switch is released. Close the sunshade by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
the vehicle has an electrical failure.
Notice: Forcing the sunshade forward of the
sliding glass panel may cause damage and the
sunroof may not operate properly. Always close the
glass panel before closing the sunshade.
3-35
✍NOTES
3-36
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................4-3
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................4-3
Horn .............................................................4-3
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel ...................4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................4-4
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................4-4
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................4-5
Flash-to-Pass .................................................4-5
Windshield Wipers ..........................................4-5
Windshield Washer .........................................4-6
Cruise Control ................................................4-7
Exterior Lamps .............................................4-10
Headlamps on Reminder ................................4-13
Headlamps Off in Park ..................................4-13
Delayed Headlamps ......................................4-13
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................4-13
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................4-14
Fog Lamps ..................................................4-14
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................4-15
Dome Lamps ...............................................4-15
Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................4-15
Parade Dimming ...........................................4-15
Reading Lamps ............................................4-16
Trunk Lamp .................................................4-16
Electric Power Management ...........................4-16
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................4-17
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................4-17
Cigarette Lighter ...........................................4-18
Climate Controls ............................................4-19
Automatic Climate Control System ...................4-19
Outlet Adjustment .........................................4-24
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............4-24
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................4-25
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................4-26
Trip Odometer ..............................................4-26
Tachometer .................................................4-26
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................4-27
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................4-28
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................4-29
Charging System Light ..................................4-30
Brake System Warning Light ..........................4-30
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .....4-31
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/
Warning Light ............................................4-32
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......4-33
Tire Pressure Light .......................................4-33
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................4-34
Oil Pressure Light .........................................4-36
Section 4 Instrument Panel
4-1
Security Light ...............................................4-37
Cruise Control Light ......................................4-37
Highbeam On Light .......................................4-37
Fuel Gage ...................................................4-38
Auto Stop Mode ...........................................4-39
Charge/Assist Gage ......................................4-39
Fuel Economy Light ......................................4-40
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................4-40
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................4-41
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................4-43
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................4-48
Audio System(s) .............................................4-53
Setting the Clock ..........................................4-54
Radio(s) ......................................................4-55
Using an MP3 ..............................................4-65
XM Radio Messages .....................................4-72
Bluetooth
®
...................................................4-74
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................4-84
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................4-84
Radio Reception ...........................................4-86
Backglass Antenna .......................................4-86
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............4-87
Chime Level Adjustment ................................4-87
Section 4 Instrument Panel
4-2
Instrument Panel Overview
Hazard Warning Flashers
|(Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press |again to turn the flashers off.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel
A tilt and telescope wheel lets the steering wheel
be adjusted.
The lever is located on the left side of the steering
wheel column.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down or backward
or forward into a comfortable position.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G:Turn and Lane-Change Signals
3:Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
P:Exterior Light Control
Flash-to-Pass.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until lane change
is complete.
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrows flash
rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be
burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses on page 6-81.
4-4
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.
This instrument panel cluster light 3comes on if the
high beam lamps are turned on while the ignition
is in ON/RUN.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps
momentarily to signal a driver in front of you that
you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper lever is on the right side of the
steering wheel.
Move the lever to control the windshield wipers.
9(Off): Turns the windshield wipers off.
&(Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers): For
intermittent or speed sensitive operation. While in this
position, turn the xband up or down to vary frequency.
The amount of delay time varies between wiping cycles
due to the delay setting selected or the speed of the
vehicle. As vehicle speed is increased or decreased,
the wiper interval also increases or decreases.
4-5
6(Low Speed): Slow wipes.
1(High Speed): Fast wipes.
8(Mist): Single wipe, move the lever down, then
release it. Several wipes, hold the lever down.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before
using them.
If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw
them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker stops the motor until it cools. If the
motor gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away
the snow or ice, and then turn the wipers back on.
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for more
than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps turn on
automatically. They turn off 15 seconds after the wipers
are turned off.
Windshield Washer
Press the button at the end of the windshield wiper
lever until the washers begin.
{WARNING:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
When the button is released, the washers stop, but the
wipers continue to wipe about three times or resume
the previous speed.
4-6
Cruise Control
Cruise control lets a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more be maintained without keeping your foot on the
accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise
control does not work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
{WARNING:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
{WARNING:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are not
using cruise, you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the steering
wheel.
I(On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control system on
and off.
4-7
RES+ (Resume): Press to resume a set speed and to
accelerate the speed.
SET−(Set): Press to set a speed and to decrease the
speed.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press Ito turn cruise control on. The indicator
light on the button comes on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET−and release it. The cruise symbol
displays in the instrument panel cluster to show the
system is engaged.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction Control
System (TCS) or Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control automatically
disengages. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 5-7 and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
page 5-5. When road conditions allow, the cruise
control can be used again.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then
the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged.
The cruise symbol in the instrument panel cluster also
goes out indicating cruise is no longer engaged. To return
to the previously set speed, you do not need to repeat the
set process again. Once at a speed of about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more, briefly press the RES+.
This takes the vehicle back up to the previously chosen
speed and stays there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
•If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press the RES+. Hold it there until the desired
speed is reached and then release the button.
•To increase the vehicle speed in very small
amounts, briefly press the RES+ and then release
it. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
4-8
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control system is already engaged:
•Push and hold the SET−until the desired lower
speed is reached, then release it.
•To slow down in very small amounts, briefly push
the SET−. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle
slows down to the previously set cruise control speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When
going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower
gear to keep the vehicle at a lower speed. When the
brakes are applied this ends the cruise control.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to disengage the cruise control:
•Step lightly on the brake pedal to disengage
the cruise control.
•Press the on/off button, to turn off the cruise
control.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition are turned off.
4-9
Exterior Lamps
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp switch has the following four positions:
2(Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, parking
lamps, and taillamps.
;(Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps and
taillamps only.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Turns on the
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) during daytime, and
the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps at night.
P(Off/On): This position is the momentary Off/On
switch for the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada;
this only works when the vehicle is in P (Park).
When operating in AUTO, a momentary turn of the switch
to off/on will turn off the Automatic Headlamp System.
Turn the switch to off/on again will turn the Automatic
Headlamp System back on. The Automatic Headlamp
System is always turned on at the beginning of an ignition
cycle.
4-10
The following charts show the condition of the vehicle’s exterior lamps when the transaxle is not in P (Park) and the
switch is moved to each position:
United States Exterior Lamp Positions for Daytime
Lamps PAUTO ;2
Headlamp OFF DRL Mode OFF ON
Parking Lamp OFF OFF ON ON
Taillamp OFF OFF ON ON
United States Exterior Lamp Positions for Nighttime
Lamps PAUTO ;2
Headlamp OFF ON OFF ON
Parking Lamp OFF ON ON ON
Taillamp OFF ON ON ON
4-11
Canadian Exterior Lamp Positions for Daytime
Lamps PAUTO ;2
Headlamp DRL Mode DRL Mode DRL Mode ON
Parking Lamp OFF OFF ON ON
Taillamp OFF OFF ON ON
Canadian Exterior Lamp Positions for Nighttime
Lamps PAUTO ;2
Headlamp ON ON ON ON
Parking Lamp ON ON ON ON
Taillamp ON ON ON ON
4-12
Headlamps on Reminder
If the driver’s door is opened and the ignition is turned off
while leaving the lamps on, a warning chime will sound.
Headlamps Off in Park
This feature works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and it is dark outside. To turn the headlamps
off when it is dark outside but keep other exterior lights
on, turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lamp
position.
To turn on the headlamps along with the other lamps
when it is dark outside, turn the exterior lamp control to
the AUTO or headlamp position.
This function does not work for vehicles first sold in
Canada.
Delayed Headlamps
The delayed headlamps feature keeps the headlamps
on for 20 seconds after the key is turned to LOCK/OFF,
then the headlamps automatically turn off.
To override the 20 second delayed headlamp feature
while it is active turn the turn signal/multifunction
lever up one position and then back to AUTO.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional DRL are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada.
The vehicle has a light sensor located on top of the
instrument panel that controls the DRL and Automatic
Headlamps. Do not cover this sensor or the headlamps
will be on when they are not needed.
The DRL system will turn the low-beam headlamps on
at a reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
•The ignition is on.
•The exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the DRL turns
on when the parking lamps are turned on.
•The light sensor detects daytime light.
•The shift lever is not in P (Park).
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, and instrument panel lights will not be on.
The DRL system will be off any time the vehicle is in
P (Park). The DRL system on vehicles sold in the U.S.
can also be turned off by using the off/on switch for
one ignition cycle.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
4-13
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp
system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness
along with other lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker,
parking lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The radio
lights will also be dim.
The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument
panel that controls the automatic headlamp system.
Do not cover the sensor or the automatic headlamp
system will turn on when it is not needed.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the DRL and the automatic
headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or
bright overhead street lights does not affect the system.
The DRL and automatic headlamp systems will only
be affected when the light sensor sees a change
in lighting lasting longer than this delay.
If vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once the
vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one minute for
the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it
is light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright
position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4-15.
To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system
off, turn the ignition on and set the exterior light switch to
the off/on position. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the
transmission must stay in P (Park) for this function.
The regular headlamps should be used when needed.
Fog Lamps
The fog lamp button is located on the instrument panel
on the left side of the steering column.
#:For vehicles with fog lamps, press to turn the fog
lamps on or off. An indicator light in the button is lit when
the fog lamps are on. The ignition must be on to use
the fog lamps.
The fog lamps turn off while the high-beam headlamps
are turned on.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
4-14
Instrument Panel Brightness
The knob with this
symbol is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering column.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten
or dim the lights.
Turn the knob completely clockwise to turn on the
interior lamps.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning
the instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column,
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the
dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or
closed.
Entry/Exit Lighting
The lamps inside the vehicle come on when any door is
opened. These lamps fade out about 20 seconds after
all of the doors have been closed or when the ignition is
turned to ON/RUN. They also come on when the unlock
symbol button or the horn symbol is pressed on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system transmitter.
The lamps inside the vehicle stay on for about
20 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition
to provide light as you exit.
Parade Dimming
Parade dimming is a separate lighting mode that is
activated when the park lamps are turned on during the
day. Usually when the park lamps are turned on during
the day, the display’s illumination and LEDs become
lower and the backlighting is activated. To avoid this
condition, backlighting is turned off, and the displays and
LEDs are set to a high predetermined intensity when
daylight conditions are detected to enhance the display’s
visibility during daytime.
4-15
Reading Lamps
For vehicles with front and rear reading lamps, press
the lens to turn the lamp on and off, while the doors are
closed. These lamps come on automatically when
any door is opened.
Trunk Lamp
The trunk lamp comes on when the trunk is opened and
turns off when the trunk is closed.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly
to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter
gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down.
This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be
displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power
that is needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery.
It does this by balancing the generator’s output and the
vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase engine idle
speed to generate more power, whenever needed.
It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some
accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4-43.
4-16
Battery Run-Down Protection
The vehicle has a battery run-down protection feature
designed to protect the vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp (trunk, reading, or visor vanity)
is left on while the ignition is turned off, the battery
run-down protection system will automatically shut the
lamp(s) off after 20 minutes. This will avoid draining
the battery.
To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of the following:
•Turn on the ignition.
•Turn the exterior lamp control off and then on.
•Open a door.
•Press any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
button (if equipped).
•Press the remote trunk release button.
•Press the power door lock switch.
The battery run-down feature will also be activated
when any door on the vehicle is left open and the
ignition is in LOCK/OFF.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone.
There are two accessory power outlets. One accessory
power outlet is located inside the storage bin below
the climate controls and the other outlet is on the rear
of the center storage console.
To use an outlet, lift the protective cap. When not in
use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
The accessory power outlet is operational at all times.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could
result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
4-17
If you experience a problem, see your dealer/retailer
for additional information on the accessory power
outlet.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Cigarette Lighter
For vehicles with a cigarette lighter, it is located on
the instrument panel below the climate controls. Push
the lighter in all the way and let go. It pops back
out when it is ready to be used.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
4-18
Climate Controls
Automatic Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle
can be automatically controlled with this system.
A. Fan Control
B. Air Conditioning
C. Recirculation
D. Hybrid Air
Conditioning
E. Rear Window
Defogger
F. Air Delivery Mode
Control
G. Display
H. Temperature Control
Climate Control Influence on Hybrid
Operation and Fuel Economy
The climate control system is dependent upon other
vehicle systems for heat and power input. Certain
climate control settings can lead to higher fuel usage
and/or fewer Auto Stops.
The following are climate control settings that use
more fuel:
•Normal air conditioning mode.
•The defrost mode.
•Extreme temperature settings, such as
60°F (15°C) / 90°F (32°C).
•High fan speed settings.
To help reduce fuel usage:
•Use the full automatic control as described under
Automatic Operation.
•Use hybrid air conditioning, instead of the normal
air conditioning.
•Select a temperature setting that is higher in hot
weather and lower in cold weather.
•Turn off the air conditioning when it is not needed.
•Only use defrost to clear the windows.
These suggestions will help to reduce fuel consumption,
but may reduce overall comfort.
4-19
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO on both the fan
speed knob and the air delivery mode knob to activate
the automatic system. When automatic operation is
active the system controls the inside temperature and
air delivery.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in full
automatic control:
1. Turn the fan knob and the mode knob to the AUTO
position.
The current set temperature displays. When AUTO
is selected, the air conditioning operation and air
inlet is automatically controlled. The air conditioning
compressor runs while the outside temperature is
over about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet is normally
set to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet
can automatically switch to recirculate inside air
to help quickly cool down the vehicle.
2. Set the temperature.
An initial setting of 73°F (23°C) is recommended.
Allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate.
Press the wor xarrow temperature buttons
to adjust the temperature setting as necessary.
If the temperature is set at 60°F (15°C) the system
remains at the maximum cooling setting. If the
temperature is set at 90°F (32°C) the system
remains at the maximum heat setting. Choosing
either maximum setting does not cause the vehicle
to heat or cool any faster.
Do not cover the sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor
regulates air temperature based on the intensity of
the sun.
Also do not cover the sensor grille on the lower
right side of the climate control faceplate, as
this regulates the inside temperature.
To avoid blowing cold air at engine start-up in cold
weather, the system delays turning on the fan until
warm air is available. The length of delay depends
on the engine coolant temperature. Turning the fan
knob overrides this delay and changes the fan to the
selected speed.
4-20
Manual Operation
The air delivery mode or fan speed, can manually be
adjusted.
9(Off): Turns the fan off. Outside air still enters the
vehicle. The direction can be changed by changing the
mode position. The temperature can also be adjusted
using either the up or down arrow temperature buttons.
9(Fan Control): Turn to increase or decrease the
fan speed.
wxTemperature Control: Press to increase or
decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow.
To change the current mode, select one of the
following:
H(Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
)(Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel outlets and the floor outlets, with some air directed
to the side window defogger.
6(Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some air directed to the side window outlets.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost modes. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
-(Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the floor and windshield
outlets.
0(Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of fog
or frost more quickly. The system automatically controls
the fan speed if defrost is selected from the AUTO mode.
If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, the
air conditioning compressor automatically runs to help
dehumidify the air and dry the windshield. The air
conditioning indicator light blinks three times if the
compressor is turned off while in this mode.
The engine will not perform Auto Stops when the defrost
mode is on.
4-21
#(Normal Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air
conditioning on and off. A light above the button comes
on to show that it is on.
When air conditioning is selected or is in AUTO mode,
the system runs the air conditioning automatically to
cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle.
While in this mode, the hybrid system does not shut the
engine down at complete stops.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for the
vehicle to cool down. Then keep the windows closed for
the air conditioner to work its best.
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation of
the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm air to
the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.
To warm or cool the air delivered, press xor wto the
desired temperature setting.
In AUTO mode the system cools and dehumidifies
the air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode,
the system maximizes its performance by using
recirculation as necessary.
N(Hybrid Air Conditioning): This setting balances
fuel economy and air conditioning comfort. When hybrid
A/C is used in warm weather, you may notice more
frequent auto stops and the cabin may be warmer as
compared to normal air conditioning.
Maximum Air Conditioning
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the Cvent mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Select #air conditioning.
4. Select the hrecirculation mode.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry.
To prevent this from happening, after the air in the vehicle
has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
Heating: On cold days when using manual operation of
the automatic system, use floor mode to deliver air to the
floor outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, press x
or wto the desired temperature setting.
To use the automatic mode, turn the knob to AUTO and
adjust the temperature by pressing xor w.
4-22
When the heater is in use, there might be slight noise or
vibration during Auto Stops. This is due to the coolant
circulation pump that continues to circulate heat through
the system during the engine Auto Stop.
The heater works best if the windows are kept closed.
h(Recirculation): Press to turn on the recirculation
mode. An indicator light above the button comes on to
show it is on. The recirculation mode recirculates and
helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. It can be
used to prevent outside air and odors from entering the
vehicle and for maximum air conditioning performance in
hot weather. Only use this mode when it is needed for
comfort.
Press this button to cancel the auto recirculation feature.
Each time the vehicle is started, the system reverts to the
auto recirculation function.
If recirculation is selected while in defrost, defog or floor
mode, the light on the button flashes three times and then
goes out to indicate that this is not allowed. This is to
prevent window fogging.
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the system
in recirculation for extended periods of time can cause
fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog, select
either defog or defrost. Make sure the air conditioning is
on. Allow the air conditioning to run automatically to help
dehumidify the air.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
<(Rear): Press to turn the rear window defogger on
or off. An indicator light above the button comes on
to show that the rear window defogger is on.
If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window
defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button is
pressed. If additional warming time is needed, press
the button again.
If the vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph
(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remains on
once the button is pressed.
If the vehicle has heated outside mirrors, the surface
of the outside mirrors also heat when the rear window
defogger is activated. See Outside Power Mirrors
on page 3-33.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
4-23
Outlet Adjustment
Use the lever located in the center of each outlet by
moving it either up and down or side-to-side, to change
the direction and amount of airflow in the vehicle.
Operation Tips
•Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into the vehicle.
•Do not use non-GM approved hood deflectors as
they could adversely affect the performance of
the system.
•Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.
•When an objectionable odor outside the vehicle is
encountered, use the recirculation mode, with the
temperature knob at a comfortable setting to prevent
the odor from entering the vehicle through the
ventilation system. This can be helpful when driving
through a long tunnel with poor ventilation. However,
extended usage of this mode in cold or cool weather
can cause window fogging.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there might be or there
is a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Gages can indicate when there might be or there is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to indicate a problem
with the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
could be a problem, check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs
can be costly and even dangerous.
4-24
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States Version Shown, Canada Similar
4-25
Speedometer and Odometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
This vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer.
The digital odometer will read 999,999 if it is turned back.
If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed, it must
be set to the mileage total of the old odometer. If that
is not possible, then it must be set at zero and a
label must be put on the driver door to show the old
mileage reading when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has
been driven since the odometer was last reset.
The trip odometer is accessed and reset through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation and
Displays on page 4-41 for more information.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
The tachometer also indicates AUTO STOP. For more
information see Auto Stop Mode on page 4-39.
4-26
Safety Belt Reminders
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for several
seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt,
unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light comes
on and stays on for several
seconds, then flashes for
several more.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor
the light comes on.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
sounds for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs
if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2-68 for more information.
The passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and
then flashes for several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
4-27
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check includes
the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 2-58.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is started.
If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed
immediately.
{WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-43
for more information.
4-28
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-68 for
important safety information. The instrument panel
has a passenger airbag status indicator.
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
off, for several seconds as a system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator will light
either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you
know the status of the right front passenger frontal and
seat-mounted side impact airbags.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag are enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4-28
for more information, including important safety
information.
United States Canada
4-29
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-43 for
more information. This light could indicate that there are
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on,
turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part
can still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking
both parts need to be working.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.
{WARNING:
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
United States Canada
4-30
This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN. If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer. If the system is working
normally the indicator light will then go off.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light also comes on when the parking brake is set.
The light stays on if the parking brake does not fully
release. If it stays on after the parking brake is fully
released, it means there is a brake problem.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display a
BRAKE FLUID message. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4-43 for more information.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully. The pedal may be harder to push or it
may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop.
Try turning off and restarting the vehicle one or two
times, if the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5-23.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine
is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with
the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 4-30.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-43 for all
brake related DIC messages.
4-31
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light
The Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system
or the Traction Control
System (TCS) indicator/
warning light comes on
briefly when the engine
is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally
the indicator light goes off.
This light, along with the appropriate Driver Information
Center (DIC) messages, indicates when the ESC
system and the TCS are working or are disabled.
If the light comes on and stays on, the TCS and
potentially the ESC system have been disabled.
Check the DIC messaging to determine which system
is turned off, or not working. If the system is not working,
the vehicle needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
When the TCS is disabled, wheel spin is not limited.
When the ESC system is disabled, the system does
not aid in maintaining vehicle directional control.
If the light comes on and flashes, the TCS or the ESC
system is actively working. When the LOW TRACTION
message appears, the system is limiting wheel spin.
When the ESC ACTIVE message appears, the system
is aiding in maintaining vehicle directional control.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5-5 and
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-7 for more
information.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-43 for
more information on the messages associated with
this light.
4-32
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This light indicates that
the engine coolant has
overheated or the radiator
cooling fan is not working.
This light comes on briefly when the engine is started. If it
does not, have the vehicle serviced by the dealer/retailer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light
goes off.
If the light comes on and the vehicle has been operating
under normal driving conditions, pull off the road, stop
the vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Cooling System on page 6-22 for more information.
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system,
this light comes on briefly when the engine is started.
It provides information about tire pressures and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires are
significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 4-40 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe
to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-48 for more
information.
4-33
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a
minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6-52
for more information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It makes sure that emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
This light comes on when
the ignition is on, but the
engine is not running, as a
check to show it is working.
If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Heeding the light can prevent
more serious damage to the vehicle. This system
assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with
this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 6-3.
4-34
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage
the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
The following can prevent more serious damage to the
vehicle:
•Reduce vehicle speed.
•Avoid hard accelerations.
•Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
•Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 6-9. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
•If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
•Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently
as designed and may cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on
acceleration. These conditions might go away once
the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 6-6.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, have
your dealer/retailer check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
4-35
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
•The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in the ON/RUN and the light is not on.
•The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if the battery has recently been replaced or if the
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control
systems during normal driving. This can take several
days of routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Light
If the vehicle has low
engine oil pressure,
this light stays on after
the engine is started,
or comes on and a chime
sounds while driving
the vehicle.
{WARNING:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
4-36
This indicates that the engine is not receiving enough
oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have some
other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
This light comes on briefly while turning on the ignition
as a check to show it is working. If it does not come
on with the ignition on, there may be a problem with
the bulb. Have it fixed right away.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 3-16.
Cruise Control Light
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 4-7 for more information.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4-5
for more information.
4-37
Fuel Gage
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage shows much fuel
is left in the fuel tank. When the indicator nears empty, a
message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-43 for more
information. The vehicle still has a little fuel left, but the
vehicle should be fueled soon. An arrow on the fuel gage
indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
These are normal and do not indicate a problem with
the fuel gage:
•At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
•It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the fuel tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the fuel tank’s
capacity to fill it.
•The indicator moves a little while turning a corner or
speeding up.
•The gage goes back to empty when the ignition is
turned off.
United States Canada
4-38
Auto Stop Mode
The AUTO STOP indicator on the tachometer shows that
the engine is stopped and is in the fuel saving mode.
When the ignition key is turned off, the tachometer
needle drops to the OFF indicator.
If the ignition is on, the vehicle is in AUTO STOP, and
the driver’s door is opened, a chime sounds.
Charge/Assist Gage
The CHARGE/ASSIST
gage displays the charge,
into and out of the
hybrid battery.
When the gage indicates ASSIST, the electric motor
assists for maximum acceleration.
When the gage indicates CHARGE, the electric motor
operates as a generator to perform regenerative braking
while decelerating. See Regenerative Braking on
page 3-28 for more information.
The gage also indicates CHARGE when the system is
recharging the hybrid battery.
If the hybrid battery or other hybrid components are
very hot or cold, the CHARGE and ASSIST functions
may be suspended until the component temperatures
are normal.
United States Canada
4-39
Fuel Economy Light
If enabled, this light comes
on briefly when the vehicle
is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally
the indicator light then goes off.
This light comes on to indicate the vehicle is achieving
fuel economy at or greater than its rated fuel economy.
Driving habits that improve fuel economy increase
the time that the fuel economy light is on.
This light can be disabled by using the Driver
Information Center (DIC) buttons. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 4-48 for more information.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC display gives you the status of many of your
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display
driver personalization menu modes and warning/status
messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,
located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC buttons are
located on the left side
of the steering wheel.
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the vehicle information mode displays.
r(Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle
information mode displays, select a personalization
menu mode setting, or acknowledge a warning
message.
4-40
Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the
same time for one second, then release the buttons
to enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 4-48 for more information.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has
different modes which can be accessed by pressing the
DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in the
following.
Information Modes
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the following vehicle information modes:
Outside Air Temperature
The outside air temperature will be displayed at the
same time as the Odometer and the Trip Odometer.
The temperature outside of the vehicle will be displayed
in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
The outside air temperature appears on the left side of
the DIC display and the odometer, or trip odometer,
appears on the right side of the display.
Odometer
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature and the odometer displays. This mode
shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven
in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 4-48.
Trip Odometer
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature along with A or B displays. These modes
show the current distance traveled since the last
reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at
the same time.
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold
the reset button for a few seconds while the desired
trip odometer is displayed.
4-41
FUEL RANGE
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE
displays. This mode shows the remaining distance
you can drive without refueling in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and the
fuel remaining in the tank.
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW displays.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVG
displays. This mode shows how many miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
your vehicle is getting based on current and past
driving conditions.
To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold the
reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.
Average fuel economy is then calculated starting from
that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset, it is
continually updated each time you drive.
MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INST
displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy at
a particular moment and changes frequently as driving
conditions change. This mode shows the instantaneous
fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average fuel economy,
this screen cannot be reset.
Under most coast conditions, 99 MPG (0 L/100KM)
displays which means that the electric motor/generator
is on and the engine is not using any fuel. At an idle
stop, AUTOSTOP displays which means that the electric
motor/generator is off, the gas engine is off, and the
engine is not using any fuel.
AV (Average) SPEED
Press the information button until AV SPEED displays.
This mode shows the vehicle’s average speed in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold the
reset button while AV SPEED is displayed.
4-42
OIL LIFE
Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’s
remaining useful life. It shows 100% when the system
is reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oil
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oil
on page 6-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”
under Engine Oil Life System on page 6-18.
COOLANT
Press the information button until COOLANT displays.
This mode shows the temperature of the engine coolant
in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
Tire Pressure
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in
the DIC. The tire pressure is shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
information button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displays
for the front tires. Press the information button again until
LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for the rear tires.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to add air
will appear in the display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6-48 and DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4-43 for more information.
DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of your vehicle’s systems.
A message clears when the vehicle’s condition is no
longer present. To acknowledge a message and clear it
from the display, press and hold any of the DIC buttons.
If the condition is still present, the warning message
comes back on the next time the vehicle is turned off and
back on. With most messages, a warning chime sounds
when the message displays. Your vehicle may have other
warning messages.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is disabled with the headlamp switch.
See Automatic Headlamp System on page 4-14
for more information.
4-43
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch.
See Automatic Headlamp System on page 4-14
for more information.
BRAKE FLUID
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4-30 for more
information. Have the brake system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
CHANGE OIL SOON
This message displays when the life of the engine oil
has expired and it should be changed.
When this message is acknowledged and cleared from
the display, the engine oil life system must still be reset
separately. See Engine Oil Life System on page 6-18
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3 for more
information.
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully
tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that it
is on properly. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the message off.
CRUISE ENGAGED
This message displays when the cruise control system
is active. See Cruise Control on page 4-7 for more
information.
DOOR AJAR
This message displays if one or more of the vehicle’s
doors are not closed properly. Make sure that the
door(s) are closed completely.
ENGINE DISABLED
This message displays if the starting of the engine
is disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine power
is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays
on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for
service as soon as possible.
4-44
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC is assisting
you with directional control of the vehicle. You may feel or
hear the system working and see this message displayed
in the DIC. Slippery road conditions may exist when this
message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.
This message may stay on for a few seconds after ESC
stops assisting you with directional control of the vehicle.
This is normal when the system is operating. See
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5-5 and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 4-32
for more information.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when ESC is
turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) on page 5-5 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 4-32 for more
information.
HOOD AJAR
This message displays if the hood is not fully closed.
Make sure that the hood is closed completely.
The vehicle will not auto stop when the hood is ajar.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery
in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 3-3.
LOW FUEL
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
on page 4-38,Fuel on page 6-5, and Filling the Tank on
page 6-9 for more information.
4-45
LOW TRACTION
This message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes when the system is
actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may
exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your driving
accordingly. This message stays on for a few seconds
after the system stops limiting wheel spin. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 5-7 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 4-32 for more
information.
LOW WASHER FLUID
This message displays when the vehicle’s windshield
washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid
reservoir to the proper level as soon as possible.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6-29.
POWER STEERING
This message displays if a problem has been detected
with the electric power steering. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.
PUSH PARK PEDAL
This message displays if the parking brake is left
engaged. See Parking Brake on page 3-27 for more
information.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY
CONTROL)
This message displays and a chime sounds if there has
been a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light
stays on solid as long as the detected problem remains
present. When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) on page 5-5 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 4-32 for more
information.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off the
road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try resetting
the system by turning the ignition off and then back on.
If this message still stays on or turns back on again while
you are driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the
ESC inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon as
possible.
4-46
SERVICE HYBRID
This message displays if the hybrid components need
to be serviced. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
SERVICE TRACTION
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
system is not functioning properly. The ESC/TCS light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light
stays on solid as long as the detected problem remains
present. When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 5-7 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 4-32 for more
information. Have the system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SRVC (Service) HILL START
This message displays if there is a problem with the
hill start assist function. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS is
not working properly. The tire pressure light also flashes
and then remains on during the same ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Light on page 4-33. Several conditions
may cause this message to appear. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 6-52 for more information.
If the warning comes on and stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. See your dealer/retailer.
TIRE LOW ADD AIR
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in one
or more of the vehicle’s tires is low on air. The low tire
pressure warning light also comes on. See Tire Pressure
Light on page 4-33. If this message appears on the
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures
checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading
Information label. See Tires on page 6-43,Loading the
Vehicle on page 5-18, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-48. The DIC also shows the tire pressure values.
See DIC Operation and Displays on page 4-41.
4-47
TRACTION OFF
This message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when the
system is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-7
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 4-32
for more information.
TRUNK AJAR
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely. See Trunk on page 3-11 for more
information.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.
All of the features listed may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the features available will be
displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed
from their default state since that time.
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:
Entering Personalization Menu
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at
the same time for one second, then release to enter
the personalization menu.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h),
only the ECO TELLTALE menu and UNITS menu
will be accessible.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes.
Press the reset button to scroll through the available
settings for each mode.
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,
the display will go back to the previous information
displayed.
Personalization Menu Modes
OIL LIFE RESET
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the engine
oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine Oil Life
System on page 6-18. See “OIL LIFE” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4-41 for more
information.
4-48
UNITS
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information
will be displayed in English units.
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be
displayed in metric units.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
LOCK HORN
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp
every time the lock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or
disabled. When LOCK HORN appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least one second
to scroll through the available settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The horn
will still chirp on the second press.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3-3 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
UNLOCK HORN
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp on
the first press of the unlock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, can be enabled or disabled.
When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3-3 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
4-49
LIGHT FLASH
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior hazard/
turn signal lighting to flash every time the lock, unlock, or
trunk release buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter are pressed, can be enabled or disabled.
When LIGHT FLASH appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will not
flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons on
the RKE transmitter are pressed.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting
will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons
on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3-3 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
DELAY LOCK
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY LOCK
appears on the display, press and hold the reset button
for at least one second to scroll through the available
settings:
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the power lock switch or
the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter a second time.
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing
the power lock switch or the lock button on the
RKE transmitter.
See Power Door Locks on page 3-8,Delayed Locking
on page 3-9, and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 3-3 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
4-50
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When
AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and hold
the reset button for at least one second to scroll through
the available settings:
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock.
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
You will need to manually unlock the doors.
See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 3-9
for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
UNLK (Unlock)
This screen displays only if DRIVER or ALL is selected
for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines
when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When
UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key is
turned off.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 3-9
for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
4-51
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior perimeter
lighting to turn on each time the unlock button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, can
be enabled or disabled. When EXT LIGHTS appears on
the display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn
on when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3-3 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
LANGUAGE
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears on
the display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.
SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.
GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
4-52
ECO TELLTALE
This feature allows you to enable or disable the Fuel
Economy Light. When ECO TELLTALE appears on the
display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
ON (default): The fuel economy light comes on when
good fuel efficient driving habits are maintained.
OFF: The fuel economy light will not come on,
regardless of how fuel efficient the driving habits are.
See Fuel Economy Light on page 4-40 for more
information.
To select a setting and exit out of the personalization
menu mode, press the information button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Exiting Personalization Menu
The personalization menu will be exited when any of the
following conditions occur:
•A ten second time period has elapsed.
•The ignition is turned off.
•The end of the personalization menu list is reached.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
{WARNING:
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
4-53
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
•Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
•Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 5-2.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not
work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 6-3.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 3-21 for more information.
Setting the Clock
To set the time and date:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN. Press Oto turn the radio on.
2. Press Hand the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
3. Press the softkey located below any one of the tabs
that you want to change.
4. To increase the time or date do one of the following:
•Press the softkey located below the selected tab.
•Press ¨SEEK, or \FWD.
•Turn fclockwise.
5. To decrease the time or date do one of the
following:
•Press ©SEEK or sREV.
•Turn fcounterclockwise.
4-54
The date does not automatically display. To see the
date press Hwhile the radio is on. The date with display
times out after a few seconds and goes back to the
normal radio and time display.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
1. Press Hand then the softkey located below the
forward arrow label. Once the time 12H and 24H,
and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and
year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)
displays.
2. Press the softkey located below the desired option.
3. Press Hagain to apply the selected default, or
let the screen time out.
Radio(s)
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown,
Radio with CD (MP3) similar
4-55
Radio Data System (RDS)
The radio may have RDS. The RDS feature is available
for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works when the
information is available. While the radio is tuned to an
FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display.
In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrect
information that causes the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
Playing the Radio
O(Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on and
off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios
with the Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) feature
automatically adjust the radio volume to compensate
for road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or
slows down, so that the volume level is consistent.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM tab on
the radio display.
4. Press the softkey under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low,
Med, or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
4-56
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to choose between FM, AM, or XM™.
f(Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
©SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong
signal in the selected band.
•To seek stations, press and release ©SEEK to go
to the previous station and stay there.
•To scan stations, press and hold ©SEEK for a few
seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio goes
to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press ©SEEK again to stop scanning.
•To scan preset stations in the selected band, press
and hold ©SEEK for four seconds until a double
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next stored
preset. Press ©SEEK again to stop scanning preset
stations.
¨SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong
signal in the selected band.
•To seek stations, press and release ¨SEEK to go
to the next station and stay there.
•To scan stations, press and hold ¨SEEK for a few
seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio goes
to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press ¨SEEK again to stop scanning.
•To scan preset stations in the selected band, press
and hold ¨SEEK for four seconds until a double
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next stored
preset. Press ¨SEEK again to stop scanning preset
stations.
4(Information): For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA,
or RDS features, press 4to display additional text
information related to the current FM-RDS or XM station;
or CD, MP3, WMA song. Song title information will be
displayed on the top line of the display while the artist
information will be displayed on the bottom line, if the
information is available during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA
playback. When information is not available, “No Info”
displays.
4-57
Storing a Radio Station
Drivers are encouraged to set up radio station favorites
while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite stations
using the softkeys, favorites button, and steering wheel
controls. See Defensive Driving on page 5-2.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can
be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located
below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the
radio favorites page button (FAV button). Press FAV to
go through up to six pages of favorites, each having
six favorite stations available per page. Each page of
favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM
stations. The current balance/fade and tone settings are
also stored with the favorite stations.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station and set the
balance/fade and tone settings to the desired levels.
2. Press FAV to display the page where to store the
station.
3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep
sounds.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be stored
as a favorite.
To setup the number of favorites pages:
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 tab.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the softkey located below the displayed
page numbers.
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time out, to return to
the original main radio screen showing the radio
station frequency tabs and to begin programming
favorites.
Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, CD, MP3, and
WMA features): If additional information is available
for the current song being played, Auto Text will
automatically page/scroll the information every
three seconds above the FAV presets on the
radio display.
To activate Auto Text:
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey under AUTO TXT tab on the radio
display.
3. Press the softkey under the ON tab on the radio
display.
If 4is pressed and the song title or artist information is
longer than what can be displayed, the extra information
will page every three seconds when Auto Text is
activated.
4-58
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): The
radio may display some or all tones such as BASS, MID,
and TREB.
To adjust the tone settings:
1. Press funtil the tone control tabs display.
2. Press the softkey below the desired tab, then turn f
to adjust the highlighted setting. The highlighted
setting can also be adjusted by pressing either
SEEK arrow, or by pressing \FWD or sREV.
The radio may be capable of adjusting bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position by pressing the softkey
below the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for more than
two seconds. The radio beeps once and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing ffor
more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.
If a station’s frequency is weak, or has static, decrease
the treble.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select preset
equalization settings.
To return to the manual mode, press EQ until Manual
displays or start to manually adjust the bass, midrange,
or treble by pressing f.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
To adjust balance or fade:
1. Press funtil the speaker control labels display.
2. Press the softkey under the desired tab, or continue
pressing fto highlight the desired tab.
3. Turn fto adjust the highlighted setting.
The highlighted setting can also be adjusted
by pressing either SEEK arrow.
On some radios, \FWD and sREV can also
be used to adjust the highlighted level.
The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fade to
the middle position by pressing the softkey below the BAL
or FADE tab for more than two seconds. The radio beeps
once and the level adjusts to the middle position.
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing ffor
more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.
4-59
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)
CAT (Category): The radio may have the CAT button
feature.
To select and find a desired category:
1. Press BAND until the XM frequency displays.
2. Press CAT to display the category labels on the
radio display. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
3. Press either of the two softkeys below the desired
category tab to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
4. To go to the previous or to the next XM station
within the selected category, do one of the
following:
•Turn f.
•Press the softkeys below the right or left arrows
on the radio display.
•Press ©SEEK or ¨SEEK.
5. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display the favorites
again.
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab.
3. Turn fto display the category to be removed.
4. Press the softkey below the Remove tab until the
category name along with the word Removed
displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove additional categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing
the softkey under the Add tab when a removed category
displays or by pressing the softkey below the Restore
All tab.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
4-60
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: Displays if the radio is no longer
calibrated properly for the vehicle. The vehicle must
be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
Loc or Locked: Displays when the THEFTLOCK
®
system has activated. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. A service fee is required to receive
the XM service. For more information, contact XM at
xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Radio Messages for XM Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 4-72 later in this
section for further detail.
Loading a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD begins playing.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Ejecting a CD
ZEJECT: Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
4-61
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
f(Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
©SEEK: Press to go to the start of the current track, if
more than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or
press multiple times to continue moving backward
through the tracks on the CD.
¨SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and
hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through the tracks on the CD.
sREV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the track displays.
Release to resume playing the track.
\FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release to resume playing the track.
RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order.
To use random:
1. Press the softkey below RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays.
2. Press the softkey again to turn off random play.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the track number displays when a CD is
in the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, No Aux Input Device Found
may display.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio may have the MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc
capability feature. For more information, see Using an
MP3 on page 4-65 later in this section.
4-62
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or
the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
•The CD player is very hot. When the temperature
returns to normal, the CD should play.
•The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
•The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
•The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
•A problem may have occurred while burning
the CD.
•The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide
it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
Care of CDs
Store CD(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD
player scans the bottom of the disc. If the bottom of a CD
is damaged it may not play properly or at all. Do not touch
the bottom of a CD while handling it. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the
outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a soft, lint free cloth or
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
4-63
Care of the CD Player
Do not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in the CD
player. Use a marking pen to write on the top of the
CD if a description is needed.
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage the
CD player.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” earlier in this
section.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system may have an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not
an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such
as an iPod
®
, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer,
etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use
as another audio source.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive
Driving on page 5-2 for more information on driver
distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
O(Power/Volume): Turn to adjust the volume.
Additional volume adjustments may have to be made
from the portable device if the volume is too quiet or
not loud.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing until it is stopped or turned off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, No Aux Input Device Found may display.
4-64
Using the USB Port
Radio’s with a USB port can control a USB storage
device or an iPod
®
using the radio buttons and knobs.
See Using an MP3 on page 4-65 for information about
how to connect and control a USB storage device or
an iPod.
USB Support
The USB connector is located on the front of the radio
and uses the USB 2.0 standard.
USB Supported Devices
•USB Flash Drives
•Portable USB Hard Drives
•Fifth generation or later iPod
•First, Second, or Third generation iPod nano
•iPod touch
•iPod classic
Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple
®
for proper operation. iPod firmware can be updated using
the latest iTunes
®
application. See apple.com/itunes.
For help with identifying your iPod, go to
apple.com/support.
Using an MP3
Format
Radios that have the capability of playing MP3’s can
play .mp3 files that were recorded onto a CD-R or
CD-RW disc. Radios that have a USB port can
play .mp3 and .wma files that are stored on a USB
storage device as well as AAC files that are stored
on an iPod
®
.
Compressed Audio
The radio can play discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio and MP3 files.
The CD player reads all MP3 files first, then the
uncompressed CD audio files.
CD-R or CD-RW Supported File and Folder
Structure
The radio supports:
•Up to 50 folders.
•Up to 8 folders in depth.
•Up to 50 playlists.
•Up to 255 files.
•Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.
•Files with an .mp3 or .cda file extension.
4-65
USB Supported File and Folder Structure
The radio supports:
•Up to 700 folders.
•Up to 8 folders in depth.
•Up to 65,535 files.
•Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.
•Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.
•AAC files stored on an iPod.
•FAT16
•FAT32
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. Files are stored
in the root directory when the disc or storage device
does not contain folders. Files accessed from the root
directory of a CD display as F1 ROOT.
Empty Folder
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the
player advances to the next folder that contains files.
Order of Play
Tracks are played in the following order:
•Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
•Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder has
played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the folder
mode has been chosen as the default display. The new
track name displays.
4-66
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. The display does not show parts of
words on the last page of text and the extension of
the filename is not displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
CDs that have preprogrammed playlists that were
created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however, there
is no playlist editing capability using the radio. These
playlists are treated as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and
are stored on a USB device may be supported by the
radio with a USB port.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3
f(Tune): Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currently
playing.
©SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through
tracks.
¨SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and
hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
sREV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the
elapsed time of the file displays. Release sREV to
resume playing.
\FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the file displays.
Release \FWD to resume playing. The elapsed
time of the file displays.
4-67
Sc(Previous Folder): Press the softkey
below Scto go to the first track in the previous
folder.
cT(Next Folder): Press the softkey below cTto
go to the first track in the next folder.
RDM (Random): MP3 files can be listened to on a CD in
random, rather than sequential order. To use random:
1. Press the softkey under the RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays to play songs from the current
CD in random order.
2. Press the same softkey again to turn off
random play.
h(Music Navigator): Press the softkey
below hto have the files played in order by
artist or album. The player scans the disc to sort
the files by artist and album ID3 tag information.
It can take several minutes to scan the disc depending
on the number of files on the disc. The radio may begin
playing while it is scanning in the background.
When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files in
order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on the
second line of the display. Once all songs by that artist
are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.
To listen to files by another artist, press the softkey
located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the next
or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing
either softkey below the arrow tab until the desired artist
displays.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album:
1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab from
the sort screen.
3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return to
the main music navigator screen.
The album name displays on the second line between
the arrows and songs from the current album begins
to play. Once all songs from that album have played,
the player moves to the next album in alphabetical
order on the CD and begins playing MP3 files from
that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey below
the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.
4-68
Connecting a USB Storage Device
or iPod
®
The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a USB
storage device.
To connect a USB storage device, connect the device
to the USB port located on the front of the radio.
To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable
that came with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connector and
connect the other end to the USB port located on the front
of the radio. If the vehicle is on and the USB connection
works, “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo may appear
on the iPod and iPod appears on the radio’s display.
The iPod music appears on the radio’s display and
begins playing.
The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle
if the vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod
automatically powers off and will not charge or draw
power from the vehicle’s battery.
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported,
it can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input
Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for
more information.
Using the Radio to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod
using the radio buttons and knobs and display song
information on the radio’s display.
f(Tune): Turn to select files.
©SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through
tracks.
¨SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and
hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
sREV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release
sREV to resume playing. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
\FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release \FWD to resume playing. The elapsed
time of the file displays.
4(Information): Press to display additional information
about the selected track.
4-69
Using Softkeys to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The five softkeys below the radio display are used to
control the functions listed below.
To use the softkeys:
1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio
display to display the functions listed below, or
press the softkey below the function if it is currently
displayed.
2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function on
it to use that function.
j(Pause): Press the softkey below jto pause the
track. The tab appears raised when pause is being used.
Press the softkey below jagain to resume playback.
Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go back
to the main display screen on an iPod, or the root
directory on a USB storage device.
c(Folder View): Press the softkey below cto
view the contents of the current folder on the USB drive.
To browse and select files:
1. Press the softkey below c.
2. Turn fto scroll through the list of folders.
3. Press fto select the desired folder. If there is
more then one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
the desired folder is reached.
4. Turn fto scroll through the files in the selected
folder.
5. Press fto select the desired file to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
•First softkey, first item in the list.
•Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
•Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
•Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
•Fifth softkey, end of the list.
4-70
h(Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h
to view and select a file on an iPod, using the iPod’s
menu system. Files are sorted by:
•Playlists
•Artists
•Albums
•Genres
•Songs
•Composers
To select files:
1. Press the softkey below h.
2. Turn fto scroll through the list of menus.
3. Press fto select the desired menu.
4. Turn fto scroll through the folders or files in the
selected menu.
5. Press fto select the desired file to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be
used to navigate in the following order:
•First softkey, first item in the list.
•Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
•Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
•Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
•Fifth softkey, end of the list.
Repeat Functionality
To use Repeat:
Press the softkey below "or 'to select between
Repeat All and Repeat Track.
"(Repeat All): Press the softkey below "to repeat
all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All
is being used. This is the default mode when a
USB storage device or iPod is first connected.
'(Repeat Track): Press the softkey below 'to
repeat one track. The tab appears raised when Repeat
Track is being used.
4-71
Shuffle Functionality
To use Shuffle:
Press the softkey below >,2,<or =to
select between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle
Songs, Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.
>(Shuffle Off): Press the softkey below 2to turn
shuffle off. This is the default mode when a USB
storage device or iPod is first connected.
2(Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Press the
softkey below =or <to shuffle all songs on
the USB storage device or iPod.
<(Shuffle Album): Press the softkey below >to
shuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod.
=(Shuffle Folder): Press the softkey below >to
shuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storage
device.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly,
but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
4-72
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel
is no longer assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the presets, choose another
station for that preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No CAT Info: No category information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle.
For security purposes, XM receivers cannot be
swapped between vehicles. If this message is received
after having the vehicle serviced, check with your
dealer/retailer.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Check Antenna: If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, the receiver or antenna could
have a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
4-73
Bluetooth
®
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make
and receive phone calls. The system can be used while
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.
The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m
(30 ft). Not all phones support all functions, and not all
phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth for
more information on compatible phones.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands if
there is too much background noise.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
Audio System
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level
is used if the volume is turned down too low.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 4-84 for more
information.
bg(Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
cx(Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
4-74
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar
®
Hands-Free
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for
more information.
Pairing Information:
•Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
•The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
•The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
•Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
•Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press and hold bgfor two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on
this process.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the list
on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on
the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that
was provided in Step 3.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
4-75
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
1. Press and hold bgfor two seconds. The
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold bgfor two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold bgfor two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
•If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
•If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
•Store
•Digit Store
•Directory
4-76
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold bgfor two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
•If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone
number.
•If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
•If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
•If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold bgfor two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
4-77
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
•If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
•To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
•If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
•If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
1. Press and hold bgfor two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
•Delete
•Delete all name tags
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold bgfor two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
4-78
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete, <name
tag>? Please say yes or no”.
•If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with
“OK, deleting <name tag>, returning to the
main menu.”
•If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The
system responds with “No. OK, let’s try again,
please say the name tag.”
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar,
if present.
To use the delete all name tags command:
1. Press and hold bgfor two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
•Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
•Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
main menu.
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
•Dial
•Digit Dial
•Call
•Re-dial
Using the Dial Command
1. Press and hold bgfor two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. Number please” followed by a tone.
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
•If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
•If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
If the number is not correct, say “No”. The system
will ask for the number to be re-entered.
4-79
Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press and hold bgfor two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
•If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
•To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
Using the Call Command
1. Press and hold bgfor two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
•If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
•If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed
by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling,
<name tag>” and dials the number. If the name
tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the name tag to be re-entered.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
4-80
Using the Re-dial Command
1. Press and hold bgfor two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the last
number called from the connected Bluetooth phone.
Once connected, the person called will be heard through
the audio speakers.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
•Press bgand begin speaking to answer the call.
•Press cxto ignore a call.
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
•Press bgto answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
•Press bgagain to return to the original call.
•To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
•Press cxto disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
Three-Way Calling
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
1. While on a call press bg. The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
4. Once the call is connected, press bgto link all
the callers together.
Ending a Call
Press cxto end a call.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can
be muted so that the person on the other end of the
call cannot hear them.
4-81
To Mute a call
1. Press bg. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
To Cancel Mute
1. Press bg. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press bg. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press bgfor more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
1. Press and hold bgfor two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK,
accessing <phone name>”.
•The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
4-82
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers
and numbers stored as name tags during a call.
This is used when calling a menu driven phone system.
Account numbers can be programmed into the
phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls.
Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press bg. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
•If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
•If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
1. Press bg. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send.
•If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
•If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
4-83
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and
phone pairing information. For information on how to
delete this information, see the above sections on
Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
Other Information
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-20 for FCC
information.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK
®
is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending
on the vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls
can be adjusted at the
steering wheel.
e+/e−(Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.
w/x(Next / Previous): Press to change radio
stations, select tracks on a CD, or to select tracks
and navigate folders on an iPod
®
or USB device.
To change radio stations:
•Press and release wor xto go to the next or
previous radio station stored as a preset.
•Press and hold wor xto go to the next or
previous radio station in the selected band with
a strong signal.
4-84
To select tracks on a CD:
Press and release wor xto go to the next or previous
track.
To select tracks on an iPod or USB device:
1. Press and hold wor xwhile listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
2. Press and release wor xto scroll up or down the
list, then press and hold wto play the highlighted
track.
To navigate folders on an iPod or USB device:
1. Press and hold wor xwhile listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
2. Press and hold xto go back to the previous
folder list.
3. Press and release wor xto scroll up or down
the list.
•To select a folder, press and hold wwhen the
folder is highlighted.
•To go back further in the folder list, press and
hold x.
c(End): Press to reject an incoming call, or end a
current call.
bg(Mute / Voice Recognition): Press to silence the
vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with Bluetooth
®
or OnStar
®
systems press
and hold bgfor longer than two seconds to interact
with those systems. See Bluetooth
®
on page 4-74 and
the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information.
4-85
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings
or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
causes an increased level of static while listening to
the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the
inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. For proper radio reception, the antenna
connector needs to be properly attached to the post on
the glass.
4-86
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window can damage the rear window
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
clear the inside rear window with sharp objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM
system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Chime Level Adjustment
The radio may be used to adjust the vehicle’s chime level.
If the radio can be used to change the volume level of the
chime, press and hold the sixth FAV softkey with the
ignition on and the radio power off. The volume level
changes between Normal and Loud. The selected
volume level appears on the radio display.
Removing the radio and not replacing it with a factory
radio or chime module will disable vehicle chimes.
4-87
✍NOTES
4-88
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............5-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................5-2
Drunk Driving .................................................5-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................5-3
Braking .........................................................5-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................5-4
Braking in Emergencies ...................................5-5
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ......................5-5
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................5-7
Steering ........................................................5-9
Off-Road Recovery .......................................5-10
Passing .......................................................5-11
Loss of Control .............................................5-11
Driving at Night ............................................5-12
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................5-13
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................5-14
Highway Hypnosis ........................................5-14
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................5-14
Winter Driving ..............................................5-15
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .............................................5-17
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................5-17
Loading the Vehicle ......................................5-18
Towing ..........................................................5-23
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................5-23
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................5-23
Towing a Trailer ...........................................5-26
Section 5 Driving Your Vehicle
5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively
is to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They
Are for Everyone on page 2-12.
{WARNING:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
•Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
•Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
Drunk Driving
{WARNING:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.
5-2
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy
to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control
of the vehicle.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 6-3.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4-30.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels
20 m (66 feet). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
the vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
5-3
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between
hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a
lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being
driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder
to push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some
power brake assist but it will be used when the brake
is applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can
take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 6-3.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a
braking skid.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on
page 4-31.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
5-4
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get
a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping
distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that
vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump or
motor might be heard operating and the brake pedal
might be felt to pulsate, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The vehicle has an Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system which combines antilock brake, traction
and stability control systems and helps the driver
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving
conditions.
When you first start the vehicle and begin to drive away,
the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS
light will be on solid, and the ESC OFF or SERVICE
ESC message will be displayed.
For more information, see Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 4-40.
This light will flash on the
instrument panel cluster
when the ESC system
is both on and activated.
5-5
The system may be heard or felt while it is working; this
is normal.
When the light is on solid and either the SERVICE ESC
or ESC OFF message is displayed, the system will
not assist the driver in maintaining directional control of
the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4-43.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is
automatically enabled whenever the vehicle is started.
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,
especially in slippery road conditions, the system should
always be left on. But, ESC can be turned off if needed.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system begins
to assist the driver maintain directional control of the
vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. The cruise control
system may be re-engaged when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on page 4-7.
The ESC/TCS button is
located on the center
console.
The traction control system can be turned off or back
on by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both
traction control and ESC, press and hold the button
briefly.
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION
OFF and ESC OFF messages will appear, and
the ESC/TCS light will be on solid to warn the driver
that both traction control and ESC are disabled.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5-17.
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that
a problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF and
SERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light will
be on solid to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and
requires service. If the problem does not clear after
restarting the vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for service.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-43 for
more information.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6-3 for more information.
5-6
Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road
conditions. The system operates only if it senses that the
front wheels are spinning too much or are beginning to
lose traction. When this happens, the system works the
front brakes and reduces engine power by closing the
throttle and managing engine spark to limit wheel spin.
This light will flash when
the traction control system
is limiting wheel spin.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working, but
this is normal.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when TCS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. The cruise control may be re-engaged when
road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 4-7.
When this light is on solid
and either the SERVICE
TRACTION or TRACTION
OFF message is displayed,
the system will not limit
wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4-43 for more information.
The Traction Control System is automatically enabled
whenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, always leave the
system enabled. TCS can be turned off if needed.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5-17.
5-7
To turn the system off or
on, press and release this
button located on the
instrument panel.
The DIC will display the appropriate message as
described previously when the button is pressed.
Traction Control Operation
Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine
power to the wheels (engine speed management)
and by applying brakes to each individual wheel
(brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when the vehicle is started, and it will activate and flash
the ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTION
message if it senses either of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving.
For more information on the LOW TRACTION message,
see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4-40.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle are allowed
to spin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and
Brake warning lights and the SERVICE ESC and/or
SERVICE TRACTION messages are displayed,
the differential could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel(s)
excessively while these lights and this message
are displayed.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, it is
possible to lose traction. If you attempt to shift with
the front wheels spinning with a loss of traction,
it is possible to cause damage to the transmission.
Do not attempt to shift when the front wheels do
not have traction. Damage caused by misuse of the
vehicle is not covered. See your warranty book
for additional information.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction
in acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibration
may be heard. This is normal.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. The cruise control
may be re-engaged when road conditions allow.
See Cruise Control on page 4-7.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6-3 for more information.
5-8
Steering
Electric Power Steering
If the engine stalls while driving, the power steering
assist system will continue to operate until you are able
to stop the vehicle. If power steering assist is lost
because the electric power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be steered but it will take
more effort.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time,
you may notice a reduced amount of power steering
assist. The normal amount of power steering assist
should return shortly after a few normal steering
movements.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems, contact your dealer/retailer for service repairs.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-43.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. These
problems can be avoided by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time
because there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes — but, unless the vehicle
has antilock brakes, not enough to lock the wheels.
See Braking on page 5-3. It is better to remove as much
speed as possible from a collision. Then steer around
the problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
5-9
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm
(3 to 5 inches), about one-eighth turn, until the right
front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn
the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
5-10
Passing
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
•Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
•Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
•Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
•Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
•When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If the traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more
limited.
5-11
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until the
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Night driving tips include:
•Drive defensively.
•Do not drink and drive.
•Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
•Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
•Watch for animals.
•When tired, pull off the road.
•Do not wear sunglasses.
•Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
•Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
•Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
5-12
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
{WARNING:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
•Allow extra following distance.
•Pass with caution.
•Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
•Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
•Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 6-43.
•Turn off cruise control.
5-13
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Things to check on your own include:
•Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
•Wiper Blades: In good shape?
•Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
•Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
•Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
•Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Other driving tips include:
•Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
•Keep interior temperature cool.
•Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
•Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
•Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
•Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
•Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
{WARNING:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
5-14
{WARNING:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
•Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
•Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
•Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5-4 improves
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads,
but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry
pavement.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road and
watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
5-15
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 8-7.
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
•Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4-3.
•Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
{WARNING:
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
•Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
•Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
WARNING: (Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
•Open a window about 5 cm (two inches) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
•Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
•Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3-30.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
5-16
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then when
you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so
the engine runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps the
battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for
help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible to
save fuel.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5-17.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
{WARNING:
If the vehicle’s tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine
compartment fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and avoid going above
55 km/h (35 mph) as shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 6-63.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not
get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be
towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see
Towing Your Vehicle on page 5-23.
5-17
Loading the Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on the vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Vehicle
Certification label.
{WARNING:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post
(striker). The Tire and Loading Information label
lists the number of occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
Label Example
5-18
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation, see
Tires on page 6-43 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-48.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 −750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 5-26 for important information
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
5-19
Item Description Total
AMaximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
453 kg
(1,000 lbs)
BSubtract Occupant
Weight 68 kg
(150 lbs) ×2=136 kg (300 lbs)
CAvailable Occupant
and Cargo Weight =317 kg (700 lbs)
Item Description Total
AMaximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
453 kg
(1,000 lbs)
BSubtract Occupant
Weight 68 kg
(150 lbs) ×5=340 kg (750 lbs)
CAvailable Cargo
Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)
Example 1 Example 2
5-20
Item Description Total
AMaximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
453 kg
(1,000 lbs)
BSubtract Occupant
Weight 91 kg
(200 lbs) ×5=
453 kg
(1,000 lbs)
CAvailable Cargo
Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)
Refer to the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed the
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
Certification Label
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
the driver side center pillar.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and tongue
weight if pulling a trailer.
Example 3
5-21
Never exceed the GVWR for the vehicle or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
front or rear axle.
{WARNING:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on
the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Notice:Overloading the vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else are put inside the vehicle, they will
go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
{WARNING:
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
•Put things in the cargo area of the
vehicle. In the cargo area, put them as
far forward as you can. Try to spread the
weight evenly.
•Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
•Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
•When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
•Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
5-22
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 8-7.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle
with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
•What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
•How far will the vehicle be towed? Some vehicles
have restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
•Does the vehicle have the proper towing
equipment? See your dealer/retailer or trailering
professional for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
•Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 5-14.
5-23
Dinghy Towing
When dinghy towing, the vehicle should be run at the
beginning of each day and at each RV fuel stop
for about five minutes. This will ensure proper lubrication
of transmission components.
To dinghy tow the vehicle from the front with all four
wheels on the ground:
1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it to the
towing vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission to P (Park) and turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. To prevent the battery from draining while the
vehicle is being towed, remove the following
fuse from the instrument panel fuse block:
(IGN SENSOR). See Instrument Panel Fuse Block
on page 6-81 for more information.
5. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.
6. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
7. Release the parking brake.
Remember to reinstall the IGN SENSOR fuse once the
destination has been reached.
Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceeded while
towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 105 km/h (65 mph) while towing the vehicle.
5-24
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed
from the rear.
Dolly Towing
Tow the vehicle with the two rear wheels on the ground
and the front wheels on a dolly:
To tow the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and a
dolly:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the gear shift lever in P (Park).
5-25
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Remove the key from the ignition.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed
from the rear.
Towing a Trailer
The vehicle is neither designed nor intended to tow a
trailer.
5-26
Service ............................................................6-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................6-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................6-4
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....6-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................6-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle ......................................................6-5
Fuel ................................................................6-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................6-6
Gasoline Specifications ....................................6-6
California Fuel ...............................................6-7
Additives .......................................................6-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................6-8
Filling the Tank ..............................................6-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................6-11
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................6-12
Hood Release ..............................................6-12
Engine Compartment Overview .......................6-14
Engine Oil ...................................................6-15
Engine Oil Life System ..................................6-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................6-20
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................6-22
Cooling System ............................................6-22
Engine Coolant .............................................6-23
Engine Overheating .......................................6-27
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................6-29
Brakes ........................................................6-30
Battery ........................................................6-32
Jump Starting ...............................................6-34
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................6-39
Bulb Replacement ..........................................6-39
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................6-39
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............6-40
License Plate Lamp ......................................6-41
Replacement Bulbs .......................................6-42
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............6-42
Tires ..............................................................6-43
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................6-44
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................6-46
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................6-48
High-Speed Operation ...................................6-50
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................6-50
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................6-52
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................6-55
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................6-57
Buying New Tires .........................................6-58
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................6-59
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................6-60
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................6-61
Wheel Replacement ......................................6-61
Tire Chains ..................................................6-63
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
6-1
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................6-64
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ....................6-65
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage .........6-72
Appearance Care ............................................6-72
Interior Cleaning ...........................................6-72
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................6-74
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ........................................6-74
Care of Safety Belts ......................................6-75
Weatherstrips ...............................................6-75
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................6-75
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................6-76
Finish Care ..................................................6-76
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................6-76
Aluminum Wheels .........................................6-77
Tires ...........................................................6-78
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................6-78
Finish Damage .............................................6-78
Underbody Maintenance ................................6-78
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................6-78
Vehicle Identification ......................................6-79
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................6-79
Service Parts Identification Label .....................6-79
Electrical System ............................................6-80
Intermediate Voltage Devices and Wiring ..........6-80
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................6-80
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................6-80
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......6-81
Fuses .........................................................6-81
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................6-81
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ....................6-84
Rear Compartment Fuse Block .......................6-87
Capacities and Specifications ..........................6-90
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
6-2
Service
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Accessories and Modifications
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories,
you will know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine
GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2-74.
6-3
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component wear by-products
contain and/or emit these chemicals.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{WARNING:
Never try to do your own service on hybrid
components. You can be injured and the vehicle
can be damaged if you try to do your own
service work. Service and repair of these hybrid
components should only be performed by a
trained service technician with the proper
knowledge and tools.
6-4
{WARNING:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
•Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
•Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8-17.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2-73.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Record on page 7-13.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep
the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
6-5
Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure
gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list of marketers
providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
an audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as
spark knock, might be heard when driving. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon
as possible. If heavy knocking is heard when using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See
Additives on page 6-7 for additional information.
6-6
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, the
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog-check
test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4-34.
If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer
for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,
look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
6-7
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other
fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
6-8
Filling the Tank
{WARNING:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The fuel cap is behind the fuel door is on the vehicle’s
passenger side. To open the fuel door, push the
rearward center edge in and release and it will open.
Turn the tethered fuel cap counterclockwise to remove.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
6-9
{WARNING:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds
before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your
Vehicle on page 6-75.
If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the CHECK GAS CAP message displays if the fuel cap
is not properly installed.
{WARNING:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/ retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it might not fit
properly. This can cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and can damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 4-34.
6-10
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{WARNING:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
•Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
•Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
WARNING: (Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
•Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
•Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
•Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
6-11
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{WARNING:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{WARNING:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
handle with this symbol
on it. It is located
inside the vehicle to
the left of the steering
column.
6-12
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood release handle toward the driver
side of the vehicle.
3. Lift the hood.
4. After the hood is slightly lifted, it will continue to
open to the full position. Before closing the hood,
be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Lower the
hood until the lifting force of the strut is reduced,
then release the hood to latch fully. Check to make
sure the hood is closed and repeat the process
if necessary.
6-13
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood, this is what you see:
6-14
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6-20.
B. Cooling Fans (Out of view). See Cooling System on
page 6-22.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-15.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-15.
E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 6-23.
F. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 6-30.
G. Battery (Out of view). See Battery on page 6-32.
H. Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 6-84.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 6-29.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-14 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down and check the level.
6-15
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, add at least
one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 6-90.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
the engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-14
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when you are through.
6-16
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
•GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
•SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
•American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
6-17
Cold Temperature Operation
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine
Oil to Use” for more information.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system
must be reset every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4-43. Change the oil as
soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the
oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service people who will perform this work using
genuine parts and reset the system. It is also important to
check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
6-18
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON
message being turned on, reset the system.
After changing the engine oil, reset the system:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press and hold the DIC INFO and reset buttons, on
the left side of the steering wheel, at the same time
to enter the personalization menu. The OIL LIFE
RESET message displays.
3. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC
display shows ACKNOWLEDGED.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on
when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a
good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of
clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of
oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
6-19
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-14 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7-3 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
do the following:
1. Remove the spring clamps that hold the cover on.
2. Lift off the cover.
6-20
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Align the filter correctly using the alignment tab.
5. Install the cover by guiding the tabs on the rim of
the top cover into the bottom hinges and turn the
cover down to close it.
6. The spring clips will engage easily, if the cover is
properly seated.
{WARNING:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into the engine, which will damage
it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you are driving.
6-21
Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the
dealer/retailer and have it repaired as soon as possible.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3, and be sure to
use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 7-10.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7-10.
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank
C. Pressure Cap
6-22
{WARNING:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{WARNING:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL
®
can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL
®
(silicate-free) coolant in
the vehicle.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL
®
engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and
how to check and add coolant when it is low. If there
is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 6-27.
6-23
What to Use
{WARNING:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL
®
coolant.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL
®
coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
•Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
•Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
•Protects against rust and corrosion.
•Will not damage aluminum parts.
•Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7-10 for more information.
6-24
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at
or above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL
®
coolant at
the coolant recovery tank, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before this is done. See Engine Coolant
on page 6-23 for more information.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark on the coolant surge tank. If it is not, you
may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator
hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or
somewhere else in the cooling system.
How to Add Coolant to the
Recovery Tank
{WARNING:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
6-25
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
{WARNING:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{WARNING:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
If coolant is needed, add the proper mixture directly to
the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer
hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about two or two and one-half turns.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will
allow any pressure still left to be vented out
the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
6-26
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the FULL COLD mark. Wait about five minutes,
then check to see if the level is below the mark.
If the level is below the FULL COLD mark,
add additional coolant to bring the level up to the
mark. Repeat this procedure until the level remains
constant at the FULL COLD mark for at least
five minutes.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run until you can feel
the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for
the engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank might be lower. If the level is lower than
the FULL COLD mark, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has an indicator to warn of engine
overheating.
There is an engine coolant temperature warning light
on the vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light on page 4-33 for more
information.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8-7.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire because of being
driven with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
6-27
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
{WARNING:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no
sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is overheated,
the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could
be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
•Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
•Stops after high-speed driving.
•Idles for long periods in traffic.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let
the engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to
drive the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes.
6-28
Keep a safe vehicle distance from the car in front of
you. If the warning does not come back on, continue to
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low, a
LOW WASHER FLUID message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4-43 for more information.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6-14 for reservoir
location.
Notice:
•When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
•Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
•Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
•Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
6-29
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT 3 brake fluid.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-14
for the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
•The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
•A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
{WARNING:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4-30.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10.
6-30
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
{WARNING:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
•Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
•If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6-75.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying
the brake pedal firmly.
{WARNING:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
6-31
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 6-90.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
The vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
brake parts. When parts of the braking system are
replaced — for example, when the brake linings wear
down and new ones are installed — be sure to get new
approved replacement parts. If this is not done, the
brakes might not work properly. For example, if
someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for the
vehicle, the balance between the front and rear brakes
can change — for the worse. The braking performance
expected can change in many other ways if the
wrong replacement brake parts are installed.
Battery
{WARNING:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
careful. See Jump Starting on page 6-34 for tips
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
6-32
{DANGER:
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
This vehicle has a standard 12-volt battery and a
36-volt hybrid battery system.
12-Volt Battery
Refer to the replacement number on the original battery
label when a new battery is needed.
36-Volt Battery System
See your dealer/retailer when a new 36-volt hybrid
battery system is needed. The dealer/retailer has
information on how to recycle the hybrid battery.
Vehicle Storage
Infrequent Usage: Remove the 12-volt battery black,
negative (−) cable, the one that is exposed, to keep the
battery from running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the 12-volt battery black,
negative (−) cable from the battery or use a battery
trickle charger.
Remember to reconnect the battery when ready to drive
the vehicle.
Notice: The 36-volt hybrid battery system should
be serviced only by a qualified facility to avoid
battery system damage. See your dealer/retailer if
service is needed.
Notice: If the vehicle is not driven for over
two months, the 36-volt hybrid battery can be
permanently damaged.
The 36-volt battery is behind the rear seat, in the trunk.
If the vehicle is stored for an extended period of time,
drive the vehicle every two months for about half an hour
to keep the 36-volt hybrid battery charged and in good
working condition.
6-33
Jump Starting
If the battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{WARNING:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
•They contain acid that can burn you.
•They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
•They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.
6-34
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. Your vehicle’s positive (+) terminal is
located under a red tethered cap on the battery.
The negative (–) terminal is located under a
black tethered cap on the battery. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6-14 for more
information on location. Flip the caps up to access
the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals.
{WARNING:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
6-35
{WARNING:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you don’t,
explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
{WARNING:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)oryou
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6-36
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (−) cable does
not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery. 9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
6-37
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (–) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (–) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
Jumper Cable Removal
6-38
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the caps over the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminals to their original positions.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 6-42.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
{WARNING:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
6-39
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps
A. Backup Lamp
B. Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3-11 for more
information.
2. Remove the convenience net hooks holding the
trunk trim.
3. Remove the three wing nuts, which hold the
taillamp assembly, from inside the vehicle.
4. Remove the taillamp assembly.
5. Remove the wiring harness from the taillamp
assembly by lifting the release tab.
6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it.
7. Pull the bulb from the socket.
8. Install a new bulb.
9. Reverse Steps 2 through 5 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
6-40
Back-up Lamp
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3-11 for more
information.
2. Remove the push nuts holding the trunk trim.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove
from the lamp assembly.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall.
License Plate Lamp
To replace the license plate lamp bulb:
1. Remove the license plate assembly by turning the
two screws counterclockwise.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
6-41
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Push the new bulb in and turn it clockwise to install.
5. Replace the license plate lamp by pushing it
through the fascia opening.
6. Turn the two screws that hold the license plate
lamp clockwise to reinstall.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp Bulb Number
Back-Up Lamp 921
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamp 4157 NAK LCP
License Plate Lamp W5W
Rear Stop/Tail/Turn Lamp 3157K LCP
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Inspect the windshield wiper blades for wear or cracking.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3.
To remove the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
2. Push the release button.
3. Slide the blade forward.
4. Turn the blade toward you and continue to slide
forward to remove.
5. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and
make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the
locked position.
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 7-11.
6-42
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details. For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.
{WARNING:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
•Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5-18.
WARNING: (Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
•Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your vehicle’s
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-48.
•Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recommended
pressure.
•Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle’s tires have been damaged,
replace them.
6-43
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The example below shows a typical
passenger (p-metric) tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size:The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification):Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN):The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material:The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
6-44
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 6-60.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width:The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio:A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,
as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high
as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code:A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter:Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description:These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.
6-45
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure:The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight:This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio:The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt:A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead:The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire:A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure:The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6-48.
Curb Weight:The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings:A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR:Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 5-18.
GAWR FRT:Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18.
GAWR RR:Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18.
Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa):The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
6-46
Load Index:An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating:The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight:The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5-18.
Occupant Distribution:Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall:The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-48 and
Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18.
Radial Ply Tire:A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim:A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall:The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating:An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction:The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread:The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
6-47
Treadwear Indicators:Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 6-57.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards):A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 6-60.
Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 5-18.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard:A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
the Vehicle on page 5-18.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
•Too much flexing
•Too much heat
•Tire overloading
•Premature or irregular wear
•Poor handling
•Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
•Unusual wear
•Poor handling
•Rough ride
•Needless damage from road hazards
6-48
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even when
they are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
6-49
High-Speed Operation
{WARNING:
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h (100 mph) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have
a crash and you or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
Set the cold tire inflation pressure to the maximum
inflation pressure shown on the tire’s sidewall, or
41 psi (282 kPa), whichever is lower. The tire’s
maximum load and inflation pressure is molded on the
tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near the rim flange.
When you end high-speed driving return the tires to the
cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-48.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
6-50
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6-52
for additional information.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
6-51
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver
when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors
are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the
vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS turns on the low tire
pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can
be viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see
DIC Operation and Displays on page 4-41 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4-43.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are
cold. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18, for an
example of the Tire and Loading Information label and
its location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-48.
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 6-55 and Tires on page 6-43.
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using
an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved tire
sealant available through your dealer/retailer.
6-52
Your vehicle, when new, included a factory-installed
Tire Inflator Kit. This kit uses a GM approved liquid tire
sealant. Using non-approved tire sealants could
damage the TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit for information regarding the inflator kit
materials and instructions.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and
DIC message to come on are:
•The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
•One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
•Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 6-58.
•Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
6-53
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. Any
time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors or
rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes need to
be matched to the new tire/wheel location. The sensors
are matched, to the tire/wheel locations, in the following
order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,
passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using a
TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure
use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match any
tire and wheel position, the matching process stops
and you need to start over.
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter’s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, at the
same time, for about five seconds to start the TPMS
learn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating the
TPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode.
4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side
front turn signal also comes on to indicate that
corner’s sensor is ready to be learned.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for about
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm
the sensor identification code has been matched to
the tire/wheel position.
6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
6-54
7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound to
indicate the tire learning process is done. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learn
mode, or if communication with the receiver stops,
or if the time limit has expired, turn the ignition
switch to LOCK/OFF and start over beginning
with Step 2.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires for signs of wear or damage.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6-57
for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-3.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to
achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that your vehicle continues to
perform most like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6-57
and Wheel Replacement on page 6-61 for
more information.
6-55
When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
front and rear inflation pressures as shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-48 and
Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6-52.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications.
{WARNING:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause a crash. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
6-56
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
•You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
•You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
•The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
•The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
•The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
6-57
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS, for mud
and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 6-44
for additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
vehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6-55
for information on proper tire rotation.
{WARNING:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial and bias-belted
tires) the vehicle may not handle properly,
and you could have a crash. Using tires of
different sizes, brands, or types may also
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the correct size, brand, and type of tires
on your vehicle’s wheels.
6-58
{WARNING:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the
vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.
Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6-50.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5-18, for more information about
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location
on your vehicle.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as, antilock brakes, traction
control, and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
{WARNING:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 6-58 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 6-3 for additional information.
6-59
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
6-60
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law. It should be noted that
the temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
6-61
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or
wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
{WARNING:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance to
the body and chassis.
{WARNING:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause a crash. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
{WARNING:
Never use oil or grease on studs or the threads of
the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel nuts might
come loose and the wheel could fall off, causing a
crash.
6-62
{WARNING:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel
nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and
even come off. This could lead to a crash. Be sure
to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Used Replacement Wheels
{WARNING:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far
it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
{WARNING:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could
cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to the vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it is contacting the
vehicle, and do not spin the vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
6-63
If a Tire Goes Flat
Your vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 6-65.
There is no spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and
no place to store a tire.
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly.
See Tires on page 6-43. If air goes out of a tire,
it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But, if you
should ever have a blow out, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would use
in a skid. In any rear blow out, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place and stopping.
Then do this:
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 4-3.
2. Park your vehicle. Set the parking brake firmly and
put the shift lever in P (Park). See Shifting Into Park
on page 3-28.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
damaged sidewalls, or has a puncture larger than a
1
⁄
4
inch (6 mm), the tire is too severely damaged for
the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8-7.
If the tire has a puncture less than a
1
⁄
4
inch (6 mm)
in the tread area of the tire, see Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 6-65.
6-64
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
{WARNING:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information,
see Engine Exhaust on page 3-30.
{WARNING:
Over-inflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the tire sealant and compressor kit
instructions and inflate the tire to its recommended
pressure. Do not exceed the recommended
pressure.
{WARNING:
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger compartment of
the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could strike someone.
Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit,
there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not be a place to
store a tire.
The tire sealant and compressor can be used to
temporarily seal punctures up to
1
⁄
4
inch (6 mm) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate
an under inflated tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire
is too severely damaged for the tire sealant and
compressor kit to be effective. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 8-7.
6-65
Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor
kit instructions.
The kit includes:
A. On/Off Button
B. Selector Switch
(Sealant/Air or
Air Only)
C. Pressure Relief
Button
D. Pressure Gage
E. Air Only Hose (Black)
F. Sealant/Air Hose
(Clear)
G. Power Plug
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
label adhered to the compressor.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before
its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After
usage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
6-66
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire
Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.
When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during
cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment
for 5 minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster.
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 6-64. Do not remove any objects that have
penetrated the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its
storage location. See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit Storage on page 6-72.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) and the power
plug (G).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 4-17.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not
use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
6-67
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while
using the air compressor.
8. Turn the selector switch (B) clockwise to the
Sealant + Air position.
9. Press the on/off (A) button to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit on.
The compressor will inject sealant and air into
the tire.
The pressure gage (D) will initially show a high
pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant
into the tire. Once the sealant is completely
dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop
and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only.
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gage (D). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-48.
The pressure gage (D) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may be turned on/off
until the correct pressure is reached.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle
should not be driven farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit
cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating
hose from the tire valve. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 8-7.
11. Press the on/off button (A) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air
until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is
distributed in the tire, therefore, Steps 12 through
18 must be done immediately after Step 11.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) counterclockwise to
remove it from the tire valve stem.
14. Replace the tire valve stem cap.
15. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), and the power
plug (G) back in their original location.
6-68
16. If the flat tire was able
to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove
the maximum speed
label from the sealant
canister and place
it in a highly visible
location.
The label is a reminder not to exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the damaged tire is repaired
or replaced.
17. Return the equipment to its original storage location
in the vehicle.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
19. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure.
Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under “Using the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to
Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured).”
If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi
(68 kPa) below the recommended inflation pressure,
stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8-7.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
20. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, and
vehicle.
21. Dispose of the used sealant canister and sealant/air
hose (F) assembly at a local dealer/retailer or in
accordance with local state codes and practices.
22. Replace it with a new canister available from your
dealer/retailer.
23. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer/retailer within a 100 miles (161 km) of driving
to have the tire repaired or replaced.
6-69
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 6-64.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its
storage location. See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit Storage on page 6-72.
2. Unwrap the air only hose (E) and the power plug (G).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the air only hose (E) onto the tire valve stem
by turning it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 4-17.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not
use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while
using the air compressor.
8. Turn the selector switch (B) counterclockwise to the
Air Only position.
9. Press the on/off (A) button to turn the compressor on.
The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.
6-70
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gage (D). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-48.
The pressure gage (D) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate reading.
The compressor may be turned on/off until the
correct pressure is reached.
11. Press the on/off button (A) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
13. Disconnect the air only hose (E) from the tire valve
stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
14. Replace the air only hose (E) and the power
plug (G) and cord back in its original location.
15. Place the equipment in the original storage location
in the vehicle.
Removal and Installation of the Sealant
Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
1. Remove the plastic cover.
2. Unscrew the connector (B) from the canister (A).
3. Pull up on the canister (A) to remove it.
4. Replace with a new canister which is available from
your dealer/retailer.
5. Push the new canister into place.
6. Screw the connector (B) to the canister (A).
7. Slide the plastic cover back on.
6-71
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Storage
The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3-11.
2. Lift the cover.
3. Turn the retainer clockwise and remove the tire
sealant and compressor kit.
To store the tire sealant and compressor kit,
reverse the steps.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause
stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also
transfer color to the vehicle’s interior.
6-72
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent
over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
•A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
•A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
•Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
•Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
•Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
•Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
6-73
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
•For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
•For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
6-74
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{WARNING:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
6-75
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6-75.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever
possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
6-76
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn
or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
•Extreme dusty conditions
•Sand and salt
•Heat and sun
•Snow and ice, without proper removal
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome
polish on chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes,
could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes.
6-77
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
6-78
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen
through the windshield from outside. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code identifies the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 6-90 for the
vehicle’s engine code.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove box, has the
following information:
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•Model designation
•Paint information
•Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
6-79
Electrical System
Intermediate Voltage Devices and
Wiring
{WARNING:
Exposure to intermediate voltage can cause shock
and burns. The intermediate voltage systems in
the vehicle can only be serviced by technicians
with special training.
Intermediate voltage devices are identified by
labels. Do not remove, open, take apart, or modify
these devices. Intermediate voltage cable or wiring
has blue covering. Do not probe, tamper with, cut,
or modify intermediate voltage cable or wiring.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2-73 and Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2-74.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem, have it fixed.
6-80
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
Fuses
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible links. This greatly reduces the chance of
damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure to
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: one in the
center of the instrument panel, one in the engine
compartment and one in the trunk.
There is a fuse puller located on the instrument panel
fuse block. It can be used to easily remove fuses
from the fuse block.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
instrument panel near the floor on the passenger side of
the vehicle.
Remove the panel cover to access the fuse block, then
remove the fuse block cover to access the fuses.
The vehicle might not have all the fuses and features
listed.
6-81
6-82
Fuses Usage
POWER
MIRRORS Power Mirrors
EPS Electronic Power Steering
RUN/CRANK Cruise Control Switch, Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator
HVAC
BLOWER HIGH Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Blower - High Speed Relay
CLUSTER/
THEFT Instrument Panel Cluster, Theft
Deterrent System
ONSTAR OnStar
®
NOT
INSTALLED Not Used
AIRBAG (IGN) Airbag (Ignition)
HVAC CTRL
(BATT)
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Control Diagnostic Link Connector
(Battery)
PEDAL Not Used
WIPER SW Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
IGN SENSOR Ignition Switch
Fuses Usage
STRG WHL
ILLUM Steering Wheel Illumination
NOT
INSTALLED Not Used
RADIO Audio System
INTERIOR
LIGHTS Interior Lamps
NOT
INSTALLED Not Used
POWER
WINDOWS Power Windows
HVAC CTRL
(IGN) Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Control (Ignition)
HVAC
BLOWER Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Blower Switch
DOOR LOCK Door Locks
ROOF/HEAT
SEAT Sunroof, Heated Seat
NOT
INSTALLED Not Used
6-83
Fuses Usage
NOT
INSTALLED Not Used
AIRBAG
(BATT) Airbag (Battery)
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER Spare Fuse Holder
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER Spare Fuse Holder
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER Spare Fuse Holder
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER Spare Fuse Holder
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver side of the engine compartment, near the battery.
The vehicle might not have all the fuses and features
listed.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
6-84
Fuses Usage
1 Air Conditioner Clutch
2 Electronic Throttle Control
3 Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) IGN
Fuses Usage
4Transmission, Transmission Control
Module Ignition 1
5 Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) Pumps
6-85
Fuses Usage
6 Emission
7 Left Headlamp Low-Beam
8 Horn
9 Right Headlamp Low-Beam
11 Left Headlamp High-Beam
12 Right Headlamp High-Beam
13 Engine Control Module BATT
14 Windshield Wiper
15 Antilock Brake System (ABS)
(IGN 1)
16 Engine Control Module (IGN 1)
17 Cooling Fan 1
18 Cooling Fan 2
19 Run Relay, Heating, Ventilation,
Air Conditioning Blower
20 Body Control Module 1
21 Body Control Module Run/Crank
Fuses Usage
22 Rear Electrical Center 1
23 Rear Electrical Center 2
24 Antilock Brake System (ABS)
25 Body Control Module 2
26 Starter
41 Electric Power Steering
42 Transmission Control Module
Battery
43 Ignition Module
44 Injectors
46 Daytime Running Lamps
47 Center High-Mounted Stoplamps
50 Driver Power Window
51 Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) BATT
52 Transmission Pump Motor
54 Battery Voltage Sense
55 Antilock Brake System (Battery)
6-86
Relays Usage
28 Cooling Fan 1
29 Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
30 Cooling Fan 2
31 Starter
32 Run/Crank, Ignition
33 Powertrain
34 Air Conditioning Clutch
35 High-Beam Headlamp
37 Horn
38 Low-Beam Headlamp
39 Windshield Wiper 1
40 Windshield Wiper 2
48 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
49 Stoplamps
53 Transmission Pump Motor
Diodes Usage
27 Wiper
Rear Compartment Fuse Block
The rear compartment fuse block is located in the trunk
of the vehicle. Access the fuse block through the
trunk panel on the driver side of the rear cargo area.
6-87
Fuses Usage
1 Passenger Seat Controls
2 Driver Seat Controls
3 Not Used
Fuses Usage
4 Not Used
5 Emission 2, Canister Vent Solenoid
6Park Lamps, Instrument Panel
Dimming
6-88
Fuses Usage
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Sunroof Controls
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Audio Amplifier
14 Heated Seat Controls
15 Not Used
16 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
XM™ Satellite Radio, UGDO
17 Back-up Lamps
18 Not Used
19 Not Used
20 Auxiliary Power Outlets
21 Not Used
22 Trunk Release
Fuses Usage
23 Rear Defog
24 Heated Mirrors
25 Fuel Pump
Relays Usage
26 Rear Window Defogger
27 Park Lamps
28 Not Used
29 Not Used
30 Not Used
31 Not Used
32 Not Used
33 Back-up Lamps
34 Not Used
35 Not Used
36 Trunk Release
37 Fuel Pump
38 (Diode) Cargo Lamp
6-89
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Refer to Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 7-10 for more information.
Application
Capacities
English Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Cooling System 8.1 qt 7.7 L
Engine Oil with Filter 5.0 qt 4.7 L
Fuel Tank 16.3 gal 61.7 L
Transmission Fluid (Bottom Pan Removal) 7.0 qt 6.6 L
Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4 Engine Z Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
6-90
Maintenance Schedule ......................................7-2
Introduction ...................................................7-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................7-3
Owner Checks and Services ............................7-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............7-10
Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................7-11
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................7-12
Maintenance Record .....................................7-13
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in
good working condition, improves fuel economy, and
reduces vehicle emissions for better air quality.
Because of all the different ways people use vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services. Please read the
information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep the
vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer.
The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that:
•carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18.
•are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
•use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 6-6.
{WARNING:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 6-4.
7-2
At your General Motors dealer/retailer, you can be
certain that you will receive the highest level of service
available. Your dealer /retailer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine GM replacement
parts, as well as, up to date tools and equipment
to ensure fast and accurate diagnostics.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7-10 and Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 7-11. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer/retailer.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and performance of the
vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service for
new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to
13 000 km (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 6-55.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Oil Soon Message
Displays
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6-15.An Emission Control Service.
When the Change Oil Soon message displays, service
is required for the vehicle as soon as possible, within
the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the
best conditions, the engine oil life system might not
indicate the need for vehicle service for more than a
year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least
once a year and the oil life system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians who
will perform this work and reset the system. If the
engine oil life system is reset accidentally, service the
vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last
service. Reset the oil life system whenever the oil is
changed. See Engine Oil Life System on page 6-18.
7-3
When the Change Oil Soon message displays, certain
services, checks, and inspections are required. The
services described for Maintenance Ishould be
performed at every engine oil change. The services
described for Maintenance II should be performed when:
•Maintenance Iwas performed the last time the
engine oil was changed.
•It has been 10 months or more since the Change
Oil Soon message has displayed or since the last
service.
Maintenance I
•Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6-15.An Emission Control Service.
•Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant on
page 6-23.
•Windshield washer fluid level check. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 6-29.
•Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-48.
•Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6-55.
•Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6-55.
•Fluids visual leak check (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). A leak in any system must
be repaired and the fluid level checked.
•Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven
in dusty conditions only). See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6-20.
•Brake system inspection (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
Maintenance II
•Perform all services described in Maintenance I.
•Steering and suspension inspection. Visual
inspection for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear.
•Engine cooling system inspection. Visual inspection
of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps and
replacement, if needed.
•Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear,
cracking, or contamination and windshield and wiper
blade cleaning, if contaminated. See Windshield
and Wiper Blades on page 6-76. Worn or damaged
wiper blade replacement. See Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 6-42.
7-4
•Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders, folding
seat hardware, and rear compartment hinges
lubrication. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7-10. More frequent lubrication
may be required when vehicle is exposed to a
corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
•Restraint system component check. See Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 2-75.
•Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6-20.
Additional Required Services
At Each Fuel Stop
•Engine oil level check. See Engine Oil on page 6-15.
•Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant on
page 6-23.
•Windshield washer fluid level check. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 6-29.
Once a Month
•Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-48.
•Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6-55.
Once a Year
•Starter switch check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7-8.
•Parking brake and automatic transmission P (Park)
mechanism check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7-8.
•Automatic transmission shiftlock control system
check. See Owner Checks and Services on
page 7-8.
•Ignition transmission lock check. See Owner
Checks and Services on page 7-8.
•Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure
check. Radiator and air conditioning condenser
outside cleaning. See Cooling System on
page 6-22.
•Exhaust system and nearby heat shields inspection
for loose or damaged components.
•Accelerator pedal check for damage, high effort, or
binding. Replace if needed.
•If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit, check the sealant expiration date printed on
the instruction label of the kit. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 6-65.
7-5
First Engine Oil Change After Every
40 000 km/25,000 Miles
•Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
80 000 km/50,000 Miles
•Engine air cleaner filter replacement. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6-20.
•Automatic transmission fluid change (severe
service) for vehicles mainly driven in heavy
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly or mountainous
terrain, when frequently towing a trailer, or used for
taxi, police, or delivery service. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6-22.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
160 000 km/100,000 Miles
•Automatic transmission fluid change (normal
service). See Automatic Transmission Fluid
on page 6-22.
•Spark plug replacement. An Emission Control
Service.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
240 000 km/150,000 Miles
•Engine cooling system drain, flush, and refill,
cooling system and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator and air conditioning
condenser (or every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). See Engine Coolant on page 6-23.An
Emission Control Service.
•Engine accessory drive belt inspection for fraying,
excessive cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An Emission Control
Service.
7-6
Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance IMaintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. ••
Engine coolant level check. ••
Windshield washer fluid level check. ••
Tire inflation pressures check. ••
Tire wear inspection. ••
Rotate tires. ••
Fluids visual leak check. ••
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only). ••
Brake system inspection. ••
Steering and suspension inspection. •
Engine cooling system inspection. •
Windshield wiper blades inspection. •
Body components lubrication. •
Restraint system components check. •
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions). •
7-7
Owner Checks and Services
Starter Switch Check
{WARNING:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3-27.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{WARNING:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 3-27.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
7-8
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
•The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in P (Park).
•The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
{WARNING:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
•To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held
by the parking brake only.
•To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
7-9
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 6-15.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL
®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 6-23.
Hydraulic Brake
System
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,
in Canada 88862807).
Windshield
Washer Optikleen
®
Washer Solvent.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Automatic
Transmission DEXRON
®
-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor,
and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door
Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 109435474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
7-10
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part Part Numbers ACDelco Part Numbers
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22676970 A1627C
Engine Oil Filter 2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G
Spark Plugs 2.4L L4 Engine 12625058 41-103
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 23.6 in (60.0 cm) 22688087 —
Passenger Side – 21.0 in (53.0 cm) 22688086 —
7-11
Engine Drive Belt Routing
The engine drive belt on this hybrid vehicle is under a
higher tension than the engine drive belt on a non-hybrid
vehicle and requires the use of a special kind of tool
to service. See your dealer/retailer for service.
7-12
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date Odometer
Reading Serviced By Services Performed
7-13
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date Odometer
Reading Serviced By Services Performed
7-14
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date Odometer
Reading Serviced By Services Performed
7-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date Odometer
Reading Serviced By Services Performed
7-16
Customer Assistance and Information ...............8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................8-2
Online Owner Center ......................................8-5
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY) Users .........................8-6
Customer Assistance Offices ............................8-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................8-7
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................8-7
Scheduling Service Appointments ....................8-11
Courtesy Transportation Program ....................8-11
Collision Damage Repair ................................8-13
Reporting Safety Defects ................................8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....8-16
Service Publications Ordering Information .........8-17
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................8-18
Event Data Recorders ...................................8-18
OnStar
®
......................................................8-19
Navigation System ........................................8-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............8-20
Radio Frequency Statement ...........................8-20
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
8-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by the dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
•Dealership name and location.
•Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest following Step One first.
8-2
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you
are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can
file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
8-3
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after
following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware
of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration
Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of
charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
8-4
Online Owner Center
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
•Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
•Online service and maintenance records
•Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
•Exclusive privileges and offers
•Recall notices for your specific vehicle
•OnStar
®
and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
•FAQ
•Contact Us
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
•My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
•My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred GM
dealers/retailers.
•My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
•My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
8-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV
(2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
8-6
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY
users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
8-7
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
•Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
•Telephone number of your location
•Location of the vehicle
•Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
•Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
•Description of the problem
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever comes
first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In
Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission
from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner
or driver if they decide the claims are made too often,
or the same type of claim is made many times.
8-8
Services Provided
•Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
•Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar
®
. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
•Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when
the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
•Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
•Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
•Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
•Legal fines.
•Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
•Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
8-9
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
•Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided
through this service.
•Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
•Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the most scenic route.
There is a limit of six requests per year. Additional
travel information is also available. Allow three
weeks for delivery.
•Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited
requires pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,
and a copy of the repair orders. Once authorization
has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements and explain how to
receive payment.
•Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
8-10
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Courtesy Transportation Program
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and extended powertrain,
and hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and
Canada.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
8-11
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by
original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
8-12
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle’s
resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not
have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
8-13
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by
using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you
assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
•Check to make sure that you are all right. If you are
uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
•If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you
are instructed to move it by a police officer.
•Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
•If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8-7 for more information.
•If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
•Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
8-14
•Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
•If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for
a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you can
get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In
some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
•Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
•Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
8-15
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
8-16
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
8-17
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle were operating
•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
•How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
•How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
8-18
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar
®
If the vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar
services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
8-19
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
Radio Frequency Statement
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio
frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
8-20
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 6-3
Accessory Power ............................................ 3-21
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 4-17
Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 6-29
Additional Factors Affecting System Operation ..... 2-72
Additional Program Information ......................... 8-12
Additional Required Services .............................. 7-5
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 6-7
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 6-80
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) .............. 4-59
Adjustment
Chime Level ............................................... 4-87
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 6-20
Airbag
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 2-74
Airbag System
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 2-65
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 2-68
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 2-73
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 2-65
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 2-66
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 2-63
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 2-61
Airbags ......................................................... 2-75
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 4-29
Readiness Light .......................................... 4-28
System Check ............................................. 2-58
AM ............................................................... 4-86
Antenna
Backglass ................................................... 4-86
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ..... 4-87
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 5-4
Warning Light ............................................. 4-31
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 6-77
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 6-75
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 6-78
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 6-76
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 6-74
Finish Care ................................................. 6-76
Finish Damage ............................................ 6-78
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ................................................. 6-74
Interior Cleaning .......................................... 6-72
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 6-78
Tires .......................................................... 6-78
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 6-78
1
Appearance Care (cont.)
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 6-75
Weatherstrips .............................................. 6-75
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 6-76
Arming the System ......................................... 3-16
Assistance Program, Roadside ........................... 8-7
Audio System ......................................... 4-53, 4-74
Audio Steering
Wheel Controls ........................................ 4-84
Radio Reception .......................................... 4-86
Setting the Clock ......................................... 4-54
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 4-84
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 4-87
Audio System(s) ............................................. 4-55
Auto Stop Mode ............................................. 4-39
Automatic Climate Control System ..................... 4-19
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation .................. 3-32
Automatic Engine Start/Stop ..................... 1-20, 3-22
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 4-14
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 6-22
Operation ................................................... 3-25
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check .............................................. 7-8
B
Backglass Antenna .......................................... 4-86
Back-up Lamp ................................................ 6-41
Battery .......................................................... 6-32
Electric Power Management .......................... 4-16
Run-Down Protection ................................... 4-17
Battery Replacement ......................................... 3-5
Belt Routing, Engine ....................................... 7-12
Blizzard Conditions .......................................... 5-16
Bluetooth Controls ........................................... 4-74
Bluetooth
®
..................................................... 4-74
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 5-5
Brake Adjustment ............................................ 6-32
Brake Fluid .................................................... 6-30
Brake Pedal Travel ......................................... 6-32
Brake Wear ................................................... 6-31
Brakes .......................................................... 6-30
Antilock ....................................................... 5-4
Parking ...................................................... 3-27
Regenerative Braking ................................... 3-28
System Warning Light .................................. 4-30
Braking ........................................................... 5-3
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 5-5
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 3-19
2
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 6-42
Fog Lamps ................................................. 4-14
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 6-39
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 6-39
Headlamps ................................................. 6-39
License Plate Lamps .................................... 6-41
Taillamps, Turn Signal and Stoplamps ............ 6-40
Buying New Tires ........................................... 6-58
C
California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements ................. 6-4
Warning ....................................................... 6-4
California Fuel .................................................. 6-7
Call Waiting ................................................... 4-81
Calling for Assistance ........................................ 8-8
Canada — Customer Assistance ......................... 8-6
Canadian Owners ............................................... iii
Canadian Owners (Propriétaires Canadiens) ........... iii
Canceling a Remote Start .................................. 1-5
Capacities and Specifications ............................ 6-90
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust ........................................... 3-30
Trunk ......................................................... 3-11
Winter Driving ............................................. 5-15
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 6-75
Care of CDs .................................................. 4-63
Care of the CD Player ..................................... 4-64
CD Messages ................................................ 4-63
CD, MP3 ....................................................... 4-65
Cellular Phone Usage ...................................... 4-86
Center Console Storage ................................... 3-34
Certification Label ........................................... 5-21
Chains, Tire ................................................... 6-63
Charge/Assist Gage ........................................ 4-39
Charging System Light .................................... 4-30
Check
Engine Lamp .............................................. 4-34
Check Engine Light ......................................... 4-34
Checking Coolant ............................................ 6-25
Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 6-15
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 6-12
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 6-78
Child Restraints
Infants and Young Children ........................... 2-35
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 2-44
Older Children ............................................. 2-32
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ................................... 2-52
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position .......................... 2-54
Systems ..................................................... 2-39
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 2-41
Chime Level Adjustment .................................. 4-87
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 4-18
3
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 6-77
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 6-76
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 6-74
Finish Care ................................................. 6-76
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 6-74
Interior ....................................................... 6-72
Tires .......................................................... 6-78
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 6-78
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 6-75
Weatherstrips .............................................. 6-75
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 6-76
Cleaning the Mirror ......................................... 3-32
Clearing the System ........................................ 4-84
Climate Control System
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 4-24
Climate Control Systems
Automatic ................................................... 4-19
Climate Controls ............................................. 1-13
Clock, Setting ................................................. 4-54
Cold Temperature Operation ............................. 6-18
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 8-13
Collision Parts ................................................ 8-13
Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant ............................ 6-65
Configurations for Use of Child Restraints .......... 2-43
Connecting a USB Storage Device or iPod
®
....... 4-69
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 3-16
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 5-3
Coolant
Engine ....................................................... 6-23
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 4-33
Cooling System .............................................. 6-22
Courtesy Transportation Program ...................... 8-11
Coverage ........................................................ 8-8
Cruise Control .................................................. 4-7
Light .......................................................... 4-37
Cupholders .................................................... 3-33
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 8-17
Customer Assistance ......................................... 8-6
Offices ......................................................... 8-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ........................... 8-6
Customer Information
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 8-17
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ........................ 8-2
D
Damage Repair, Collision ................................. 8-13
Data Recorders, Event .................................... 8-18
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ......................... 4-13
Defensive Driving ............................................. 5-2
Delayed Headlamps ........................................ 4-13
Delayed Locking ............................................... 3-9
Deleting Name Tags ........................................ 4-78
Dinghy Towing ................................................ 5-24
Disarming the System ..................................... 3-16
Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 4-65
4
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 6-4
Dolly Towing .................................................. 5-25
Dome Lamps ................................................. 4-15
Door
Ajar Reminder .............................................. 3-8
Delayed Locking ........................................... 3-9
Locks .......................................................... 3-8
Power Locks ................................................ 3-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 3-9
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 3-10
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 4-40
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 4-41
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 4-48
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 4-43
Driver Storage Compartment ............................ 3-34
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 5-12
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 5-14
Defensive ..................................................... 5-2
Drunk .......................................................... 5-2
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 5-14
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 5-14
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 5-13
Loss of Control ........................................... 5-11
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 5-10
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 5-17
Winter ........................................................ 5-15
Driving for Better Fuel Economy ....................... 1-23
Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 5-15
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Tones .......... 4-83
E
EDR ............................................................. 8-18
Ejecting a CD ................................................ 4-61
Electric Power Steering ..................................... 5-9
Electrical Equipment, Add-On ............................ 6-80
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 6-84
Fuses ........................................................ 6-81
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 6-81
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 6-81
Rear Compartment Fuse Block ...................... 6-87
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 6-80
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key
®
III+ ........................................... 3-17
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
PASS-Key
®
III+ ........................................... 3-18
Electronic Stability Control ................................. 5-5
Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light ........... 4-32
Emergency Trunk Release Handle ..................... 3-12
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs ................................................... 4-36
Ending a Call ................................................. 4-81
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 6-20
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ........... 4-34
Compartment Overview ................................ 6-14
Coolant ...................................................... 6-23
5
Engine (cont.)
Coolant Heater ............................................ 3-24
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 4-33
Cooling System ........................................... 6-22
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 7-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 3-30
Oil ............................................................. 6-15
Overheating ................................................ 6-27
Starting ...................................................... 3-21
Engine Identification ........................................ 6-79
Engine Oil
Life System ................................................ 6-18
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil Flushes ........... 6-18
Entering Personalization Menu .......................... 4-48
Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 4-15
Event Data Recorders ..................................... 8-18
Exiting Personalization Menu ............................ 4-53
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature ................... 3-15
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override ................. 3-15
Express-Down Window .................................... 3-14
Express-Up Window ........................................ 3-14
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 2-32
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 4-10
Exterior Mirrors ................................................ 1-9
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 6-20
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM Satellite Radio Service Only) .................. 4-60
Finding a Station ............................................ 4-57
Finish Damage ............................................... 6-78
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 4-3
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 4-5
Flat Tire ........................................................ 6-64
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 6-22
Windshield Washer ...................................... 6-29
FM Stereo ..................................................... 4-86
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 4-14
Folding Rear Seat ........................................... 2-10
Format .......................................................... 4-65
Front Storage Area ......................................... 3-34
Fuel ............................................................... 6-5
Additives ...................................................... 6-7
California Fuel .............................................. 6-7
Economy Light ............................................ 4-40
6
Fuel (cont.)
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 6-11
Filling the Tank ............................................. 6-9
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 6-8
Gage ......................................................... 4-38
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 6-6
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 6-6
Fuel Economy
Driving for Better ......................................... 1-23
Fuses ........................................................... 6-81
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 6-84
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 6-81
Rear Compartment Fuse Block ...................... 6-87
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 6-80
G
Gages
Charge/Assist .............................................. 4-39
Fuel .......................................................... 4-38
Speedometer .............................................. 4-26
Tachometer ................................................. 4-26
Trip Odometer ............................................. 4-26
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 6-6
Specifications ............................................... 6-6
Glove Box ..................................................... 3-33
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 8-7
H
Halogen Bulbs ................................................ 6-39
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 4-3
Head Restraints ............................................... 2-2
Headlamps
Aiming ....................................................... 6-39
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 6-39
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ..................... 4-13
Delayed ..................................................... 4-13
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 4-10
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 4-5
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 4-5
On Reminder .............................................. 4-13
Headlamps Off in Park .................................... 4-13
Heater
Engine Coolant ........................................... 3-24
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 4-37
High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 6-50
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 5-14
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 5-14
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 6-12
Release ..................................................... 6-12
Horn ............................................................... 4-3
How OnStar Service Works .............................. 1-25
How the System Alarm is Activated ................... 3-17
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 6-26
How to Add Coolant to the Recovery Tank ......... 6-25
How to Check ................................................ 6-49
7
How to Detect a Tamper Condition .................... 3-17
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ....... 6-20
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System ........... 6-19
How to Turn Off the System Alarm .................... 3-17
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 2-17
Hydroplaning .................................................. 5-13
I
If a Crash Occurs ........................................... 8-14
If No Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment .............................................. 6-28
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment .............................................. 6-28
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an Adult-Size
Occupant ................................................... 2-71
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint ...... 2-71
Ignition Positions ............................................. 3-20
Ignition Transmission Lock Check ....................... 7-9
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 2-35
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 6-48
Information Modes .......................................... 4-41
Instrument Panel
Brightness .................................................. 4-15
Cluster ....................................................... 4-25
Storage Area .............................................. 3-34
Insuring Your Vehicle ....................................... 8-14
Interior Mirror ................................................. 1-10
Intermediate Voltage Devices and Wiring ............ 6-80
Introduction ...................................................... 7-2
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 6-34
K
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System ................................... 3-3
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 3-3
Keys ............................................................... 3-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 6-44
Lamps
Daytime Running (DRL) ................................ 4-13
Dome ........................................................ 4-15
License Plate .............................................. 6-41
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 4-34
Reading ..................................................... 4-16
Trunk ......................................................... 4-16
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 2-26
LATCH System for Child Restraints ................... 2-44
Leaving the Vehicle with the Engine Running ...... 3-29
Lift Seat, Power ............................................... 2-9
Light, Auto Stop Mode ..................................... 4-39
Lighter, Cigarette ............................................ 4-18
8
Lighting
Entry/Exit ................................................... 4-15
Parade Dimming .......................................... 4-15
Lights
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 4-28
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............ 4-31
Brake System Warning ................................. 4-30
Charging System ......................................... 4-30
Cruise Control ............................................. 4-37
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 4-33
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 4-10
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 4-5
Fuel Economy ............................................. 4-40
Highbeam On ............................................. 4-37
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 4-5
Oil Pressure ............................................... 4-36
On Reminder .............................................. 4-13
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 4-29
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 4-27
Security ..................................................... 4-37
Tire Pressure .............................................. 4-33
Loading a CD ................................................ 4-61
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 5-18
Locks
Delayed Locking ........................................... 3-9
Door ........................................................... 3-8
Lockout Protection ....................................... 3-10
Power Door .................................................. 3-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 3-9
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 3-10
Loss of Control ............................................... 5-11
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 2-44
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 2-5
M
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Record .................................... 7-13
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 7-11
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 7-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 7-10
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 7-3
Maintenance I.................................................. 7-4
Maintenance II ................................................. 7-4
Making a Call ................................................. 4-79
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 4-34
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process ... 8-15
Manual Locks .................................................. 1-5
Manual Reclining Seatbacks ............................... 2-6
Manual Seat .................................................... 1-6
Manual Seats ................................................... 2-4
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 4-43
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 3-32
Manual Rearview ......................................... 3-32
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 3-33
9
MP3 ............................................................. 4-65
Muting a Call ................................................. 4-81
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca ............. 8-5
N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 8-19
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 3-19
O
Odometer ...................................................... 4-26
Trip ........................................................... 4-26
Off-Road
Recovery .................................................... 5-10
OilEngine ....................................................... 6-15
Engine Oil Life System ................................. 6-18
Pressure Light ............................................. 4-36
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 2-32
Online Owner Center ........................................ 8-5
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet ................... 8-5
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 8-19
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls ........................ 1-26
Operation Tips ................................................ 4-24
Other Information ............................................ 4-84
Other Rainy Weather Tips ................................ 5-13
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 4-24
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 4-17
Outside
Power Mirrors ............................................. 3-33
Overseas — Customer Assistance ...................... 8-6
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 7-8
Owner Information ........................................... 8-17
Owners, Canadian .............................................. iii
P
Paint, Damage ............................................... 6-78
Pairing .......................................................... 4-75
Parade Dimming ............................................. 4-15
Park
Headlamps Off in Park ................................. 4-13
Shifting Into ................................................ 3-28
Shifting Out of ............................................ 3-29
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 3-27
Over Things That Burn ................................. 3-30
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 4-29
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ............... 4-27
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 2-68
Passing ......................................................... 5-11
PASS-Key
®
III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............... 3-17
PASS-Key
®
III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation ................................................... 3-18
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 6-4
10
Personalization Menu Modes ............................ 4-48
Phone
Bluetooth
®
.................................................. 4-74
Playing a CD ................................................. 4-62
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3 ....................... 4-67
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc ............... 4-62
Playing the Radio ........................................... 4-56
Power
Door Locks .................................................. 3-8
Electrical System ......................................... 6-81
Lift Seat ....................................................... 2-9
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 2-5
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 3-21
Seat ............................................................ 2-5
Windows .................................................... 3-14
Power Door Locks ............................................ 1-5
Power Lumbar Adjustment ................................. 1-8
Power Reclining Seatbacks .......................... 1-7, 2-8
Power Seats .................................................... 1-7
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts .......................... 2-31
Privacy .......................................................... 8-18
Navigation System ....................................... 8-19
OnStar ....................................................... 8-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ............. 8-20
Program
Courtesy Transportation ................................ 8-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 3-9
Programming the Power Windows ..................... 3-14
Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle ............. 3-4
Proposition 65 Warning, California ....................... 6-4
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 2-16
R
Radio Data System (RDS) ............................... 4-56
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) ..................................... 8-20
Statement ................................................... 8-20
Radio Messages ............................................. 4-61
Radio(s) ........................................................ 4-55
Radios
Reception ................................................... 4-86
Setting the Clock ......................................... 4-54
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 4-84
Reading Lamps .............................................. 4-16
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 3-10
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 2-29
Rear Window Defogger .................................... 4-23
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 3-32
Automatic Dimming ...................................... 3-32
Receiving a Call ............................................. 4-81
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 2-6
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 7-10
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 5-23
Regenerative Braking ...................................... 3-28
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility ................. 8-7
11
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 3-3
Remote Start Ready ......................................... 3-7
Remote Trunk Release .................................... 3-11
Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 3-5
Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister .... 6-71
Repair Facility ................................................ 8-14
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 6-42
Replacement Parts
Maintenance ............................................... 7-11
Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 6-32
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 8-16
General Motors ........................................... 8-16
U.S. Government ......................................... 8-16
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 2-75
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 2-76
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 3-21
Ride Control Systems ....................................... 5-5
Electronic Stability (ESC) ................................ 5-5
Roadside Assistance Program ............................ 8-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 5-17
Roof
Sunroof ...................................................... 3-35
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 3-31
S
Safety Belt Pretensioners ................................. 2-28
Safety Belt Reminder Light ............................... 4-27
Safety Belts ................................................... 2-75
Care of ...................................................... 6-75
Extender .................................................... 2-32
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 2-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 2-26
Reminders .................................................. 4-27
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 2-12
Use During Pregnancy ................................. 2-31
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government .................................. 8-16
General Motors ........................................... 8-16
U.S. Government ......................................... 8-16
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iv
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 7-3
Scheduling Appointments ................................. 8-11
Sealant Kit, Tire .............................................. 6-65
Seats
Head Restraints ............................................ 2-2
Power Lift Seat ............................................. 2-9
Power Lumbar .............................................. 2-5
Power Seats ................................................. 2-5
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 2-6
Split Folding Rear Seat ................................ 2-10
12
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 2-52
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 2-54
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the
Vehicle ....................................................... 2-40
Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint ...... 2-41
Security
Light .......................................................... 4-37
Service ........................................................... 6-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 6-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle ..................................................... 6-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 6-4
Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 4-34
Parts Identification Label ............................... 6-79
Publications Ordering Information ................... 8-17
Scheduling Appointments .............................. 8-11
Service Bulletins ............................................. 8-17
Service Manuals ............................................. 8-17
Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance ...... 8-9
Services Provided ............................................. 8-9
Services Specific to Canadian Purchased
Vehicles ..................................................... 8-10
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 2-73
Setting the Clock .................................... 1-15, 4-54
Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble) ............. 4-59
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 6-78
Shifting
Out of Park ................................................ 3-29
Shifting Into Park ............................................ 3-28
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 2-28
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 4-4
Skidding ........................................................ 5-11
Specifications and Capacities ............................ 6-90
Speedometer .................................................. 4-26
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................... 2-10
Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 3-5
Starter Switch Check ........................................ 7-8
Starting the Engine ......................................... 3-21
Starting the Vehicle ........................................... 1-4
Steering .......................................................... 5-9
Steering in Emergencies .................................... 5-9
Steering Tips ................................................... 5-9
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 4-84
Steering Wheel, Tilt and Telescopic ..................... 4-3
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ........... 5-19
Storage Areas
Center Console ........................................... 3-34
Cupholders ................................................. 3-33
Driver Storage Compartment ......................... 3-34
Front Storage Area ...................................... 3-34
Glove Box .................................................. 3-33
Instrument Panel ......................................... 3-34
Storing a Favorite Station ................................. 1-14
Storing a Radio Station .................................... 4-58
Storing Name Tags ......................................... 4-76
Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...... 6-72
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 5-17
Sun Visors ..................................................... 3-15
Sunroof ......................................................... 3-35
13
T
Tachometer .................................................... 4-26
Taillamps
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps .......................... 6-40
Telescopic Wheel .............................................. 4-3
Temperature – A, B, C .................................... 6-61
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 8-6
Theft-Deterrent Feature .................................... 4-84
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 3-16
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 3-16
PASS-Key
®
III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............ 3-17
PASS-Key
®
III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation ................................................ 3-18
Three-Way Calling .......................................... 4-81
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 4-3
Time, Setting .................................................. 4-54
Tire and Loading Information Label .................... 5-18
Tire Sealant ................................................... 6-66
Tire Size ....................................................... 6-45
Tires ............................................................. 6-43
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 6-77
Buying New Tires ........................................ 6-58
Chains ....................................................... 6-63
Cleaning .................................................... 6-78
Different Size .............................................. 6-59
High-Speed Operation .................................. 6-50
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 6-64
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 6-48
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 6-55
Tires (cont.)
Pressure Light ............................................. 4-33
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 6-52
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 6-50
Sealant and Compressor Kit ................. 6-65, 6-72
Sidewall Labeling ......................................... 6-44
Terminology and Definitions ........................... 6-46
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 6-60
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 6-61
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 6-61
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 6-57
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and
Industry and Science Canada ........................ 6-51
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/
Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance ..................... 8-7
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
P (Park) Mechanism Check ............................. 7-9
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 3-24
Torque Lock ................................................... 3-29
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 5-23
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 5-26
Your Vehicle ............................................... 5-23
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message ............... 6-53
TPMS Sensor Matching Process ....................... 6-54
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 5-7
Traction Control Operation ................................. 5-8
Traction – AA, A, B, C ..................................... 6-60
14
Transferring a Call .......................................... 4-82
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 6-22
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 3-25
Transportation Options ..................................... 8-12
Transportation Program, Courtesy ...................... 8-11
Treadwear ..................................................... 6-60
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A ......... 6-60
Trip Odometer ................................................ 4-26
Trunk ............................................................ 3-11
Trunk Assist Handle ........................................ 3-12
Trunk Lamps .................................................. 4-16
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 4-4
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 4-4
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 6-60
United States — Customer Assistance ................. 8-6
Using ABS ....................................................... 5-5
Using Softkeys to Control a USB Storage
Device or iPod ............................................ 4-70
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack ........................... 4-64
Using the Radio to Control a USB Storage
Device or iPod ............................................ 4-69
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit to
Temporarily Seal and Inflate a Punctured Tire ..... 6-67
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured) ........................................... 6-70
Using the USB Port ........................................ 4-65
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 5-3
Loading ...................................................... 5-18
Remote Start ................................................ 3-5
Running While Parked .................................. 3-31
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 8-18
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 6-79
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 6-79
Vehicle Personalization .................................... 1-17
DIC ........................................................... 4-48
Vehicle Storage .............................................. 6-33
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 4-24
Visors ........................................................... 3-15
Voice Pass-Thru ............................................. 4-82
Voice Recognition ........................................... 4-74
15
W
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 4-24
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 4-43
Hazard Flashers ............................................ 4-3
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iv
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 6-17
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 6-19
What to Use .......................................... 6-24, 6-29
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 6-61
Different Size .............................................. 6-59
Replacement ............................................... 6-61
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................... 6-57
When the Change Oil Soon Message Displays ..... 7-3
When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 6-16
When to Change Engine Oil ............................. 6-18
When to Check .............................................. 6-49
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ..... 6-20
Where to Put the Child Restraint ....................... 2-41
Why Safety Belts Work .................................... 2-13
Window Lockout ............................................. 3-15
Windows ....................................................... 3-13
Power ........................................................ 3-14
Windshield
Washer ........................................................ 4-6
Washer Fluid .............................................. 6-29
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 6-42
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 6-76
Wiper Fuses ............................................... 6-80
Wipers ......................................................... 4-5
Winter Driving ................................................ 5-15
X
XM Radio Messages ....................................... 4-72
XM Satellite Radio Service ............................... 4-61
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna ..................................................... 4-87
XM™ Satellite Radio Service ............................ 4-86
Y
Your Responsibility .......................................... 1-26
16

Navigation menu